Konica 7013
Plain-paper digital Fax/Copier/Printer
Operating Instructions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
®
Statement
The Konica 7013 carries the CE mark.
As an Energy Star partner, Konica has determined that this
product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency.
This indicates that the machine complies to EN55022 1998 (Class B), EN55024 1998,
EN61000-3-2 1995 +A1 +A2, and EN61000-3-3 1995 in accordance with EEC directive
89/336/EEC.
In addition the machine has been safety tested to IEC60950 1991 +A1 +A2 +A3 +A4 in
accordance with EEC directive 73/23/EEC.
Energy saving
Your machine can save the energy with its Energy Saving Mode.
The Konica 7013 is a Class 1 LED product conforming to IEC60825-1 1993 +A1.
In the Energy Saving Mode the printer will not use its fusing lamp and “Energy Save
Mode” will be displayed on the LCD. If your machine receives a fax message or if any
key is pressed your machine will automatically wake up.
The time for the machine to enter the Energy saving mode can be selected from 1 to
240 minutes. For details, see page 1.19.
This equipment is suitable for connection to analog PSTN telephone networks that
conform to the signaling requirements of CTR21. In case of a problem for further
information please contact your supplier.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before using your Konica fax machine
Clean
Where to set up your fax machine
Dust buildup can damage your fax. Periodically
clean your fax machine as described in the operating
instructions. Do not use a dust cover, which can
cause damaging overheating.
Follow these guidelines when setting up your fax machine:
Away from direct sunlight
To avoid overheating, set up your fax machine away
from direct sunlight or a heater.
Near a phone jack
Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) tele-
phone jack, also known as an LJU.
Level, and vibration-free
To avoid damage to the machine or injuries, set the
fax machine up in a level, vibration-free location.
Space around the fax machine
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set
up the machine in an area that meets the minimum
requirements for clearance as illustrated below.
Avoid extreme high / low temperature
50 - 89.6 F
Use your fax machine within the temperature range
(
)
10 - 32 C
of 10º C to 32º C (50º F to 89.6º F).
60 cm
(23.6 inches)
15 cm
(5.9 inches)
25 cm
(9.8 inches)
Away from a television or radio
Many appliances and office equipment, including
televisions, radios, copy machines, air conditioners
and computers, can generate electronic noise that
can interfere with the operation of your fax
machine.
40 cm
40 cm
(15.7 inches)
(15.7 inches)
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power requirements
General Precautions
Plug in the power cord
Never disassemble your fax machine!
Disassembling your fax machine can cause serious
injury to you and damage to your fax. If service is
required, call your authorised Konica dealer.
Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a
wall outlet. Do not leave any portion of the electrical
cord’s metal plugs exposed. Doing so could cause a
fire and poses a risk of electrical shock.
Do not share an extension cord
connector with other plugs
It can cause electrical shock.
Keep away from liquids
Keep liquids and metal pins or other objects away
from your fax machine. If something falls into the
fax machine, remove the plug from the outlet, and
call your authorised Konica dealer.
Never handle your fax machine or
power cord with wet hands
Never touch your fax machine or power cord if your
hands are wet.
Do not share an outlet with a large
appliance
High-consumption appliances such as a refrigerator
or air conditioner can cause “draw-downs” which
could damage your fax machine.
During electrical storms, disconnect
the plug from the outlet
Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or
damage to the fax machine.
230 VAC outlet
Use a standard three-pronged 230 V electrical outlet
to power your fax machine. Using any other electri-
cal outlet will cause damage to your fax.
AC 230V
For domestic use only
Never use your fax machine outside the country in
which you purchased it. Doing so may violate
telecommunication and safety regulations of that
country, and variations in electrical and telephone
standards can cause poor performance and damage
to your fax.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not put furniture or equipment on
the power cord
Do not put anything on or over the electrical power
cord, and do not route the power cord under rugs or
carpets. Doing so can damage the power cord or fax,
and can cause fire or electrical shock.
Storing and handling toner and drum cartridges
To avoid damage to your fax machine and to assure the best performance possible,
follow these guidelines when storing and handling toner and drum cartridges:
Store the cartridge
Store the cartridge at a constant temperature within a range of 0º C to 35º C (32º F
to 95º F). To avoid dew do not store cartridges in locations subject to extreme fluctu-
ation of temperature and humidity.
Avoid temperature fluctuations
Sudden changes in temperature can cause damag-
ing condensation to form inside your fax machine.
Do not stand the cartridge on its end and do not store it
upside down.
Do not open the protective bag of the cartridge until you are
ready to install the cartridge.
Allow clearance around the outlet
Don’t stack boxes or furniture around the outlet.
Do not store cartridges in areas of:
• Direct sunlight
• Dusty conditions
• Near floppy disks or other computer media, computer screens, or any other mate-
rials sensitive to magnetic fields.
DO NOT BURN TONER CARTRIDGES!
The toner powder is extremely flammable. Exposure to
flame can cause toner cartridges to burn or explode,
causing serious injury.
Use caution when carrying the fax
Lift and carry the fax machine as described in your
operating instructions. Some fax machines require
two people to safely and properly carry.
Be careful not to get the toner powder in
your eyes.
If the toner powder gets in your eyes, wash your eyes well
and see a doctor.
Use supplies manufactured
Keep cartridges away from water or oil.
Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight.
specifically for Konica fax machines
Using toner cartridges and other supplies that are
not manufactured specifically for Konica machines
may affect the operation of your unit.
Do not expose the cartridges to static or
other electrical shock.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page is intentionally blank.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Welcome to your Konica fax machine!
These instructions are divided into the following sections.
Find your serial number and write it down
•
“Getting started” (page 1.1) describes how to set up your
machine, operating tips and some important settings that you
should perform before you use your machine.
Please note that your machine’s serial
number is located on the bar code label
as shown on the drawing at right.
Use the blank at the bottom of this
column to copy this down before you
set up your machine.
•
•
•
•
“Basic operations” (page 2.1) describes the basic operations of
the transmission, reception and copying.
“Advanced features” (page 3.1) describes the convenient features
of your machine.
The serial number is shown IOF0 with
five digits numbers, like “IOF012345”.
“Changing the default settings” (page 4.1) describes how to
change the settings of your machine.
Bar cord label
Finally, “Just in case … ” (page 5.1) helps you if you ever have a
problem with your machine. It also tells you how to give your
machine the kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to
a minimum.
Please copy down your machine’s serial number below for future reference, and note
the machine’s model number:
My machine’s serial number: ________________________________________
My machine’s model number: Konica 7013
Thanks for choosing Konica.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Before using your Konica fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Where to set up your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Storing and handling toner and drum cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Sending a fax using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4
Sending a fax using the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5
Sending a fax using MONITOR/CALL key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6
Reviewing or cancelling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.8
View the result of fax transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
Answering calls manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10
How to select the fax reception mode: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11
If the paper runs out while fax reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.11
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
Your machine’s copier features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
Basic copy procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
Single copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12
Stacking multiple copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
Enlarged or reduced copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13
Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
Memory overflow message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
If the paper runs out while copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
Making copy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Copy protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Dialing a telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
On-hook dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Changing the dialing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18
Getting started
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
Parts of your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
Control Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Power tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Unlocking the mirror carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6
Attach the extension paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7
Turning off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.8
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11
Changing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11
Turning off the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11
How to operate the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.11
Entering characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.12
Searching the functions using the cursor key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.13
Function table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.14
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Clearing stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Entering initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18
Advanced Features
Basic Operations
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Autodialer basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
Using one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2
Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
Call group dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7
Telephone Index dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Memory overflow message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.3
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9
Sending a broadcast fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Setting up a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Creating or modifying a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Erasing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
Regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.14
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.16
Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.20
Setting the activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.20
Setting the reports: TCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.21
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.22
Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.22
Using alternative telephone network service providers . . . . . . . . . . . .3.23
The power of Multi-Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.24
F-Code Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.25
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.34
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49
The passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.49
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.51
Setting Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.53
Using department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.55
Changing redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5
Settings for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
Copy scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
Adjusting the copy print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
Changing the copy auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7
Setting copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7
Setting sort copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7
Setting Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.7
Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
Setting the silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
Setting Sleep mode (Energy saving mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Primary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Setting the paper source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Setting 2-bin tray (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.9
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
Printing a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
Just in case …
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
If an original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
If a printout jams inside your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5
LCD error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.9
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.12
Cleaning tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.12
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.12
Cleaning the platen glass, contact glass and white pad . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
Cleaning the LED print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.15
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
Working with your answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
How your fax machine works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.16
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.17
Changing the default settings
Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
Scan settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
Setting ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
TTI transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3
Print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.3
Setting the number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4
Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5
Changing the dialing pause length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5
Appendix and index
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AI.3
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
This chapter describes how to
set up your machine, operating tips
and some important settings
before you use your machine
Packaging contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Parts of your machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Control Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Function table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Packaging contents
Parts of your machine
Note: Any terms used here that are unclear to you right now will be explained in
detail in the coming pages.
1
4
18
5
3
6
2
2
3
7
8
9
1
10
11
17
12
SOFT KEY
13
ENERGY
SAVING
COPY/FAX
MODE
16
REDIAL
A4
A5
SORT
/
PAUSE
DIALING
OPTION
F
AX©
15
4
5
COMBINE
SECURITY
MEMORY
TX
BYPASS
LTR
H.LTR
DIAL
PREFIX
REPORT
14
TTI TX
FLASH
COVER
MONITOR
CALL
P
AGE
/
LGL
F4
NEGA
POSI
ONLINE
/
Control Panel — The keys you use to operate your machine. (See pages
1.3–1.4 for more details.)
6
7
8
9
1
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) — The ADF automatically feeds
Included in your machine’s packaging:
1. Main unit with 500-sheet paper cassette installed
2
original document into the machine, one at a time. It can hold up to 50 pages.
Scanner cover — Opens this cover to remove original document jams.
3
4
2. Drum cartridge
3. Toner cartridge
4. Extension paper tray
5. AC power cord
6. Operating instructions and Quick reference
7. Paper size stickers
8. One-touch labels
Document guides — Adjust these to fit the width of the original document
so it will feed properly into the machine.
9. Soft Key labels
Document tray — Holds original documents placed for scanning into the
machine.
5
Platen cover — Opens to scan an original document using the platen glass.
Note: Be sure to save the box (or boxes) and packing materials for reshipment.
6
7
Original document exit — Where your original document comes out after
being scanned.
Top cover — Opens to provide access for changing the toner and drum car-
8
9
tridge (or, occasionally, fixing printout jams).
AC power switch — Turns your fax machine on and off.
1.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
AC power jack — Where you plug in the AC power cord.
10
11
Bypass tray — Open and use the bypass tray to use the paper that cannot
be set in the paper cassette. It can hold up to 50 sheets of paper. For details
about paper capacity of the bypass tray, see “Specifications,” page AI.2.
25
Side cover — Open to fix a printout jam.
12
13
14
15
Side cover release — Pull this to open the side cover.
Top cover release — Pull up on this to open the top cover.
24
Recording paper size sticker — Shows the size of the paper that is set in
the paper cassette.
Recording paper level indicator — Shows the level of the current paper
16
17
18
23
supply without requiring you to open the paper cassette.
LINE PHONE2 PHONE1
Paper cassette — Set paper here. It can hold up to 500 sheets. For details
about paper capacity of the paper cassette, see “Specifications,” page AI.2.
22
Platen glass — Makes it possible for you to fax or copy objects and even
irregularly shaped sheets, just as a conventional copier.
19 20 21
LINE jack — Where you plug in the telephone line cord. The other end of the
19
20
cord plugs into a wall telephone jack.
PHONE2 jack — If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is
where you plug in the cord.
PHONE1 jack — Not used.
21
22
PRINTER PARALLEL port (optional) — Where you plug in the printer cable,
when you use the optional printer controller.
RS-232C interface port (optional) — Where you plug in the RS-232C
23
cable, when you use the optional RS-232C interface kit.
or
Network printer port (optional) — Where you plug in the network cable,
when you use the machine’s printer on a network.
Extension paper tray — Holds up the printout after it emerges.
24
25
Printed document exit — Where the printout emerges.
1.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Control Panel Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
14
28
27
26
25 24 23
22
21 20 19 18 17
16
15
COPY light — Glows when the machine is in the Copy mode.
COPY COUNT — Pressing this key will make you see the number of total
1
2
3
7
8
printed pages on the LCD.
FAX light — Glows when the machine is in the Fax mode.
MONITOR/CALL — Pressing this key will turn the monitor speaker on or off.
When it’s on, it allows you to hear the call you’re making. When using this
feature, you can only hear the communication taking place.
ALARM light — Glows when a problem occurs during fax communication,
printing or scanning. The light stays on until the machine prints a Check
Message report.
BROADCAST — Pressing this key will send a broadcast fax (sending the same
document to more than one location).
9
10
11
COMM. light — Glows when the machine is communicating with another
machine.
4
5
6
GROUP — Press this to set up a fax transmission to a call group, a set of fax
numbers which will receive the same document in one fax operation.
MEMORY RECEIVE light — Glows when the machine is receiving an incoming
fax document into its electronic memory.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
—
In Fax mode: Chooses from following several fax options – delayed transmis-
Soft Keys — Shortcut keys. Any function that can be turned on or off can be
programmed into these three keys. If the light above one of these keys glows,
this indicates the setting that’s been programmed into it (see page 3.16) is
turned on. These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following
functions on or off:
sion, Polling, F-Code transmission, F-Code polling and Batch transmission.
Or, in Copy mode: You can use Nega/Posi copy.
COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM. — Pressing this key will stop the transmission, or to
review pending fax commands and the activity journal.
12
Soft key 1: SORT — Pressing this key will turn the Sort feature on or off.
START — Pressing this key will begin a fax transmission, reception or copying.
13
14
15
Note: If the optional printer controller has been installed on your machine,
STOP — Stops the current operation and ejects a document from the ADF.
this key will be the ONLINE key.
Soft key 2: FAX© — Pressing this key will turn the Fax & Copy feature on
or off. (Page 3.20.)
COPY RESET — Use in copy mode only. Pressing this key will reset the copy
settings to their defaults.
Soft key 3: BYPASS — Pressing this key will change the paper size in the
bypass tray. (Page 1.10.)
1.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Numeric keypad — Just like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialing
DOCUMENT/RESOLUTION
—
16
17
27
28
phone. Use these to dial phone and fax numbers and to enter numbers when
you’re setting up the machine.
In Fax mode: Pressing this key will toggle among the three resolution modes
and grayscale.
In Fax mode:
Or, in Copy mode: Pressing this key will select the type of your document.
SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX — Starts a speed-dialing operation, which you finish by
pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch and
speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory. (See
page 3.8.)
COPY/FAX — Pressing this key will toggle between Fax mode and Copy mode.
Or, in Copy mode:
ZOOM – Pressing this key will turn on or off the ZOOM light.
When the ZOOM light glows, you can set the copy reproduction ratio at 1%
steps by using
or
key.
When the ZOOM light is not lit, you can choose one of several fixed copy repro-
duction ratio by using or key.
Program key — Any function can be started by first pressing this key and
18
19
then entering the function number.
Cursor Keys
— Scrolls (moves) through features and command options as dis-
played on the LCD.
29
30
31
ENTER — It confirms user settings, begins operations and moves through com-
20
21
22
mand levels.
CANCEL — Pressing this key will delete characters on the LCD and cancel com-
mands you have entered into the machine.
PAPER SIZE/NEXT DOC
—
In Copy mode:
Selects the printout paper you want to use.
fliptab A
fliptab B
fliptab C
While scanning a document:
Pressing this key will tell your machine to scan one or more additional docu-
ments after the current scanning ends.
Macro Keys — Programming the Macro keys (M1 and M2) can reduce many
steps of the operation to a simple press of a key. You can “teach” the Macro
keys to carry out one of the several operations (see pages 3.17–3.19).
29
30
31
DOCUMENT SIZE — Instructs the fax to scan A4, A5 or F4 sized documents
when you use the platen glass.
23
24
Programmable One-Touch Keys — The keys labeled P1 and P2, this lets
you teach your machine an advanced multi-step function just once, then recall
the function at any time by pressing one of these keys.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) — Shows the machine’s status and lets you
see what you’re programming into the machine. The display shows 2 lines, 20
characters per line. If the LCD is blank, the machine is off.
One-Touch Keys — The keys labeled 01-55 offer one-touch dialing conve-
nience. Also, you may use these keys to enter the characters when you are
setting up the machine.
Printer status lights — Green lights indicate the acceptable paper sources.
Red light will glow if the printer problem (such as paper jam) occurred.
25
26
CONTRAST — Pressing this key will adjust the contrast level.
1.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Setting up
Pick an installation spot
Unlocking the mirror carriage
Your fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting your
machine’s mirror carriage during shipping.
Where should you install your fax machine? The location should be:
• Clean — Dust buildup can damage your machine. (However, do not use a cover!)
• In the open — Allow at least 30 cm of clearance around your machine. Be sure
Important: Do not turn the power on until after you have unlocked the mirror
that you never cover the machine. Its vents must be able to “breathe.”
carriage. Otherwise, damage could result.
• Away from direct sunlight — This helps avoid overheating.
Important: Gently close the top cover so that you don’t catch your hands, possibly
injuring them.
• Dry — Avoid any location where splatters or sprays (such as from a water foun-
tain) could reach your fax machine.
Open the top cover. Loosen the screw which secures the mirror carriage lock-
1
• Level, and vibration-free.
ing plate, and then slide the plate.
• Near a phone jack — Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone
jack, also known as an LJU.
• Near an AC power outlet — The AC power cord is about 1.8 m long when
stretched to its limit, and the power cord should never be stretched to its limit.
Power tips
LOCK
UNLOCK
• Use a standard three-pronged 230 VAC outlet.
• Make sure the outlet isn’t controlled by a wall switch.
If it is, you’ll risk occasional shutoffs to the machine, causing you
to lose fax messages.
• Don’t use an outlet which also is supplying power to a
large appliance, such as a refrigerator or air conditioner.
Such high-consumption appliances can cause “draw-downs”
(temporary drops in the power available for other equipment on
the circuit) which could damage your fax machine.
After unlocking the mirror carriage, secure the mirror carriage locking plate
2
mounting screw.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE YOU USE THE MACHINE, YOU MUST
TURN OFF THE TRANSPORT MODE (see page 1.8).
Note: If you must ship your machine for some reason, turn on the transport mode,
turn the power off and then lock the mirror carriage (undo the above proce-
dure).
• Use an electrical surge suppressor, preferably one which guards both tele-
phone and electrical lines. This device helps to shield your fax machine from
damaging high-voltage electrical surges.
1.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Installing the printing supplies
Unpack a new toner cartridge from its
carton. Then, holding the toner car-
tridge with both hands, slowly shake it
to distribute the toner evenly inside the
cartridge.
3
4
Your fax prints incoming faxes and copies with a reliable 600 dpi print engine. Your
fax requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):
• The drum cartridge — It yields 20,000 “normal” A4-sized printouts (see
“Specifications,” page AI.2). By “normal,” we’re referring to the amount of text
and/or graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test docu-
ment.
Note: Do not touch the roller of the
toner cartridge.
• The toner cartridge — It yields 16,000 “normal”, A4-sized printouts (see
“Specifications,” page AI.2).
Note: The toner cartridge included with your machine is starter toner cartridge,
which yields 3,000 printouts. Please purchase regular, full-yield toner car-
tridge from your authorized Konica dealer.
Gently install the toner cartridge in
the printer, making sure the toner car-
tridge’s two pins fit in the slits inside
the printer frame.
To install these supplies:
Important: Gently close the top cover so that you don’t catch your hands, possibly
injuring them.
Pull up the top cover
1
release and open the top
cover.
Unpack the drum cartridge from its carton.
5
6
Note: Shield the drum cartridge from light, especially strong light. Later, if
you have to remove the cartridge from the machine, immediately
wrap it in a thick cloth to protect it from light.
Slide the printer cover
2
Gently install the drum cartridge in
the printer, making sure the drum
cartridge’s four pins fit in the slits
inside the printer frame.
release and open the
printer cover.
1.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Plug in and power up
Gently clean the LED print head
using the cleaning paper included in
the toner cartridge carton box.
For best print quality, you should
clean the LED head every time you
change the new toner cartridge.
Note: Do not use abrasive materials
on the LED print head, and
do not subject the LED print
head to strongly shock.
7
Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the LINE jack on the machine’s
1
2
rear side and the other end into a standard telephone wall jack.
Plug the non-pronged end of the AC power cord into the AC power cord jack
on the right rear side of the machine and the pronged end into a 230 V electri-
cal outlet (preferably on a surge suppressor, as mentioned on page 1.5).
Important: Be sure that you do not turn the power on (next step) until after
you have unlocked the mirror carriage locking plate. (see page
1.5).
Gently close the printer cover.
8
9
Close the top cover. Be sure to push on a portion of the cover to lock it into its
original (closed) position.
Note: The fax machine will not work if the cover isn’t closed properly.
Attach the extension paper tray
Attach the extension paper tray by inserting its two pegs at a slightly upward angle
into the appropriate holes, as shown.
Use the AC power switch to turn on your machine. The markings are interna-
tional standards: I means on, O means off.
3
It will take a few seconds for the machine to warm up. The LCD shows:
** Warming Up **
When the machine is ready to use (standby mode), you will see:
Copy Ready
1
A4 Auto 100%
1.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Turning off the transport mode
Loading paper
Important: After unlocking the mirror carriage (see page 1.5), you must turn the
Acceptable paper size and cassette capacity
transport mode off by following procedures.
Paper source Paper type
Paper size
Capacity
500 sheets
When the machine is in the transport mode, the LCD shows:
1
Paper cassette Plain paper*
A4 , A5 , F4
A4 , A5 , A6 , F4
Letter , Legal , Half-letter , 50 sheets
Mirror Locked
,
1
Plain paper*
Bypass Tray
2
Executive , Custom-sized*
To turn off the transport mode:
Envelopes
DL , Com#10 , Monarch
1 sheet
20 sheets
20 sheets
Press Program key, *,
E.
Postcard
Transparency* A4
100 × 148mm
1
3
Mirror Locked :On
1
2
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
* Paper weight: 60 – 90 g/m
* (97 – 216) mm × (140 – 356) mm (Width × Length): It only can use if the optional
Printer Controller is attached.
2
Select Off by pressing
or . Then press ENTER to turn off the transport
2
mode. The mirror carriage will move to the home position.
3
* We recommend: 3M PP2500 for laser printers or equivalent
Mirror Locked :Off
Note: Do not use any paper which has been creased, wrinkled or has absorbed any
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
moisture.
Important: If you must reship the machine, turn on this mode to move the mirror
Loading paper in paper cassette
carriage to the transport position (in step 2, above, press
or
to
set the transport mode to On), then power off and lock the mirror car-
riage using the mirror carriage locking plate (see page 1.5).
Before you load paper, note the following:
• After you loaded paper in paper cassette, you must need to “tell” your machine
which size of the paper, A4-, A5- or F4-sized, you loaded.
You can do this by the “Setting of the paper size” operation. (See next page.)
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume
You can set the volume of the monitor speaker.
Note:If you will be using A4-sized paper, there’s no need to adjust the cassette;
your machine is initially set for A4-sized paper. Simply attach the A4
sticker to the outside of the paper cassette.
Press MONITOR/CALL on the control panel. You now should hear a dial tone.
1
Open the paper cassette from the front of your machine by gently pulling it
toward you.
And press
or
of the cursor key. The LCD indicates the volume:
1
** Tel Mode **
■■
■■
■■
Volume:
To turn the volume up, press
.
2
3
To turn the volume down, press
.
Press MONITOR/CALL again to hang up.
1.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Helpful Tip: The paper level indicator on the
front paper cassette lets you see
how much paper is in the cassette
without your having to open the cas-
sette. When you see the paper level
indicator drop (i. e., show more blue
area), make sure you have a supply
of paper nearby. Then, when you see
the “Please Supply Paper” message
on the display, you’ll be ready to
refill the cassette.
While pressing the release lever,
slide the paper length guide to the
position for the paper size you
want to use.
2
3
Press down the paper lifting plate.
Paper level
indicator
Insert the paper into the cassette.
4
• Before you insert paper in the
cassette, stack it so the leading
edge and sides of the paper are
even.
Important: To avoid paper jams, do not refill this paper cassette without first
removing all of any paper which may remain in it. In other words, do
not just add sheets to an already-loaded stack.
• Do not stack the paper over the
limit mark inside of the cas-
sette.
• Place the edges of the top sheet
under the metal tabs on the
cassette’s left and right side.
Setting of the Paper Size
Default setting: 1st cassette: A4, 2nd cassette(option): A4, Bypass tray: A4
When you change the size of paper in the paper cassette, also you must change the
paper size setting, below.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
1st Cassette :A4
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Adjust the paper guides to fit the
size of paper.
5
Press
or
until the recording paper size for the first cassette you want
2
appears. In this example, we’ve chosen F4.
1st Cassette :F4
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER.
3
4
If you have the optional second cassette, proceed to step 4.
Otherwise, skip to step 6.
Gently push the paper cassette back into its original (closed) position. You’ll
feel a click when it’s properly in place.
6
7
Press
or
until the recording paper size for the second cassette you want
appears. In this example, we’ve chosen A5
.
Attach the paper size sticker on the cassette’s front.
2nd Cassette :A5
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER.
5
1.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Press
or
until the recording paper size for the bypass tray you want
6
appears. In this example, we’ve chosen A4.
Bypass Tray :A4
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER.
Press STOP to return the machine to standby mode.
7
Loading paper in bypass tray
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine’s paper
cassette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency
film), use the bypass tray.
Open the bypass tray on the right
side of your machine.
1
Pull out the hopper of the bypass
2
tray and pull the flapper release
lever.
Place the paper on the bypass
3
tray. Adjust the paper guide to fit
the paper and insert the paper
until it comes to a stop.
Then push back the flapper
release lever.
Note: In Fax mode, if you have set the A4, A5 or F4 sized paper in the bypass
tray, the machine will use this paper when it runs out of the paper in the
paper cassette during the fax reception.
1.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Operating tips
Changing modes
How to operate the machine
To press: 0 (zero), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, # or *
You can use this machine not only as a
fax machine, but as a copier as well.
Use:
Tip:
The numeric keypad.
COPY/FAX key
At no other time within this manual will we refer to the letters printed
below the numeric keys and their uses (such as accessing abc by pressing
the 2 key.) These letters are there only for your convenience in using your
fax machine as a telephone.
Press COPY/FAX to change to the fax
mode or copy mode.
Fax mode: If you want to use facsimile
features, change to the Fax mode.
Copy mode: If you want to use copier
To press:
Use:
Tip:
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
or any other letter key
function, change to the Copy mode.
The one-touch key labeled with that letter.
Please don’t confuse the zero (0) with the letter
O.
When the machine is in the Fax mode,
the FAX light on the control panel is on, and if the machine is in the Copy mode, the
COPY light is on.
Here’s an example. If we say “press Program key, A, 1, 0, 1, ENTER” …
… you’d press Program key
Note: You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:
• When scanning a fax message for transmission.
• During the real time transmission.
… then
… then
A
1
(one-touch key 01(A))
… then 0 (the numeric key zero)
… then
… and then ENTER
1
• When programming any function settings.
Standby display of each mode:
Note: Even though our example above includes commas, do not enter them into
the fax machine. Those characters appear in our instructions to separate
one number from the other. They do not need to be entered into your fax
machine.
Fax Ready
1 Jan 2001 0:00
Copy Ready
1
A4 Auto 100%
In Fax mode
In Copy mode
There is a function (broadcasting) which requires commas to be entered, but
there is a special way to enter them. We’ll explain this process later.
In other way, you can search almost all of your machine’s function using the cursor
key. See page 1.13.
Turning off the power
Fax documents stored in memory will be lost 72 hours after you turn the power
switch off or unplug the power cord. (See “Specifications,” page AI.1.)
1.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Using CODE to enter characters
Entering characters
Some settings give you a chance to enter characters; for your TTI, remote fax’s name
or others. To enter letters or other characters, use one-touch keys, numeric keypad
or CODE keys.
Also, you can use the CODE key to enter special characters or symbols.
When the machine prompts you to enter a name, press CODE.
1
The LCD changes to:
Your Name ;Code
_
Using one-touch keys to enter characters
Open the one-touch cover and use the one-
touch keys to enter letters and other
non-numeric characters.
Find the character you want to enter in the chart below.
2
First keypress
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
→
←
A
Ç
B
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
C
D
↑
↓
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
a
o
¿
E
α
F
p
q
θ
Your Name ;Upper
_
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
!
"
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
˚
β
ε
µ
σ
ρ
The word “Upper” means the machine will
enter only upper-case letters.
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
Ω
ü
Σ
π
x
`
.
To type a lower-case letter, press ALPHABET
which is one of the one-touch keys.
ALPHABET
CODE
\
″
The display changes to:
Ö
Ü
J
j
Your Name ;Lower
_
K
L
M
N
O
C
D
E
F
¥
]
^
_
î
ì
Ä
£
¥
¡
«
»
÷
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters.
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALPHABET.
P
t
n
ƒ
˚
Å
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.
The legends in the black border indicate which key you press, and in which
order, to get a given character.
For example, to get a back-slash (\) character, you’d press C, 8. (The blank
areas for 2, 0 and C, 0 indicate spaces.)
To enter each character, press the key combination listed on the chart.
Cancelling characters
3
4
If you entered an incorrect letter or digit, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
Important: Remember, there are three ways to enter characters:
To change just one character in name and/or digit, press
or
to move the cursor
Enter
Using
to that character or digit. Then press CANCEL to erase it. Re-enter the character or
Numbers
Numeric keypad
One-touch keys
digit correctly.
Letters/characters
Letters/characters/numbers
CODE chart for key combinations
Press ENTER to save the name.
1.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Searching the functions using the cursor key
In this manual, we explain the operation with short-cut operations (for example, we
will say, “press Program key, A, 1, 0, 1. . .”), however you can search and enter
almost all of functions using the Program key and Cursor key.
Helpful Tip: When you want to search any function settings in your machine, you
will need the function table (see next page) for your searching. Please
use it for your help.
Program key
To search and enter the function set-
tings:
Press the Program key.
1
2
Search the level one function
Cursor keys
groups using
or
of cursor key
until your desired item appears.
After you find the level one function item you want to program, press
cursor key to go to the level two function groups .
of
3
4
5
6
Search the level two function groups using
desired item appears.
or
of cursor key until your
After you find the level two function item you want to program, press
cursor key to go to the level three function groups .
of
Search the level three function groups using
desired function appears.
or
of cursor key until your
Note: You can go back to previous level function groups by pressing
of
cursor key before you have entered the level three function by press-
ing ENTER.
Press ENTER to entry the function setting.
7
Note: You can press Program key to entry the setting instead of ENTER.
1.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Function table
Level one function
A. Autodial Entries
Level two function
1.One-touch Dial
Level three function
01.Enter One-Touch
(Max. 55 locations.)
Summary of setting
Select one-touch key and register the fax dial numbers and names,
also group numbers on one-touch dial keys.
Default setting
—
Page
3.2
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.
02.Erase One-Touch
01.Enter Speed-Dial
(Max. 145 locations.)
Erase the registration in a one-touch key.
Select speed-dial number and register the fax dial numbers and
names, also group numbers as Speed-Dial numbers.
—
—
3.3
3.4
2.Speed Dial
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.
02.Erase Speed-Dial
3.Program One-Touch 01.Enter P One-Touch
Erase the registration in a speed-dial number.
Program several operations for a function you frequently use.
This key can reduce several steps to a simple press of a key.
—
—
3.5
3.34
02.Erase P One-Touch
Erase the programming in a programmable one-touch key.
Select the size of paper in the paper cassette.
Enter the protection passcode for using the security features.
Program to turn on or off any functions with just pressing this key.
Soft key 1: SORT
—
A4
3.48
1.9
3.49
B. User Settings
1.Machine Settings
01.Cassette Size
02.Protect Passcode
03.Soft Key
—
See left.
3.16
Soft key 2: FAX©
Soft key 3: BYPASS
04.Silent Mode
05.Sleep Mode
06.Fax & Copy
07.Primary Mode
08.Service Mode
Mute your machine.
Conserve power.
Make a copy of your document each time it transmit.
Determine the primary mode, Fax mode or Copy mode.
For technical support. Do not set this setting to on unless an
authorized technician asks you to do so.
Off
On
Off
None
4.8
4.9
3.20
4.9
Off
—
09.Paper Source
Select paper source (paper cassette and bypass tray) for
fax reception or copying.
Select the paper tray for delivery.
• Copy exit
For Fax / Copy
4.9
1
10.2-Bin Tray*
Lower tray
Upper tray
Upper tray
Upper tray
• Received fax document exit
• List exit
4.9
2
• PC-Fax print exit*
*1: This option appears only if the optional 2-Bin tray has been installed.
*2: This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed.
1.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Page
Level one function
B. User Settings
Level two function
2.Fax Settings
Level three function
01.Scan Parameters
Summary of setting
Default setting
You can set the following settings for send fax message.
• Primary resolution mode
• Primary contrast mode
Normal
Normal
4.1
02.Print Parameter
You can set the following settings for receive fax message.
• Reduction rate
Auto
24 mm
Off
4.3
• Reduction margin
• Half-page reception
03.# of Rings
04.Redial
Number of rings before your machine answers.
Number of times and interval for automatic fax redialing.
Two times
Two times
Three minutes
4.4
4.5
05.Dialing Pause
06.Memory Tx
07.Quick Memory Tx
08.TTI Tx
Dialing pause length.
Two times
On
On
4.5
4.2
4.2
4.2
On/Off setting for Memory transmission.
On/Off setting for Quick Memory transmission.
On/Off setting for sending your TTI.
On
09.ECM Mode
10.Block Junk Fax
11.Security Rx
12.PIN Mode
On/Off setting for ECM mode.
On
Off
Off
Off
4.1
Reject the fax reception from unauthorized incoming faxes.
Keep all received fax messages in memory and after print them.
Prevent unauthorized long-distance calls.
Enter passcode for limiting polling access.
3.53
3.49
3.51
3.15
13.Passcode
—
14.Audible alarm
When your machine receives a fax message, it will sound the
alarm tone.
Enter the appropriate access number to access the alternative
telephone service provider.
Off
—
3.22
3.23
15.Dial Prefix
3.Copy Settings
01.Scan Parameters
You can set the following settings for copying.
• Primary document type
• Primary contrast mode
Text
Normal
4.6
02. Print parameter
03.Auto Reset Time
04.Copy Auto
You can set the margin for copying.
Set the time (minutes) of resetting the copy parameters.
Set the default setting to “Auto” for one of the following:
• Paper size • Reduce/Enlarge ratio • Document size
24 mm
3 minutes
4.6
4.7
Paper size
4.7
05.Copy Protect
06.Sort Copy
07.Nega/Posi
On/Off setting for Copy protection.
On/Off setting for Sorting copy.
On/Off setting to reverse copy of black and white areas.
Enter the IP Address, Subnet mask and Gate way address.
Off
On
Off
—
2.17
4.7
2.17, 4.7
—
3
4.Printer Settings
01.TCP/IP*
*3: This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.
1.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Level one function
Level two function
5.Scanner Settings*
Level three function
01.Scan Parameter
02.Scan Size
Summary of setting
Enter the scanning parameters.
Set the scanning size.
Set the time (minutes) resetting the scan parameters.
Print the Activity journal automatically after 100 transactions.
Change the printing order of the activity journal.
Print the TCR (Transmit Confirmation Report) automatically
after transmitting.
Default setting
Page
4
B. User Settings
—
—
—
Off
Off
—
—
—
03.Auto Reset
C. Other Settings
1.Journal & Reports
01.Journal Auto Print
02.Journal Line Up
03.Report AutoPrint
3.20
3.21
Off
3.21
2.Cover Page
01.Set Cover Page
02.Enter Cover Page
01.Set Dept. Protect
02.Set Dept. Code
03.Set Dept. Setting
04.Erase Dp.TimeList
01.Set F-Code Box
02.Erase F-Code Box
01.Set Batch Box
On/Off setting for sending the Cover page.
Enter your message for the cover page.
Protection for department code settings.
Register the Department code.
On/Off setting for Department code activation.
Clear the total counts of each department code.
Create the F-Code box.
Erase an empty F-Code box.
Create the Batch box.
Erase an empty batch box.
Store the document to be retrieved by other fax machine.
Store the document to be retrieved by other F-Code compatible
fax machine.
Erase stored document for polling transmission.
Erase stored document in the F-Code box.
Erase stored document in the Batch box.
Print the stored document for polling transmission.
Print the stored document in the F-Code box.
Print the stored document in the Batch box.
Print the fax received document during Security reception (and
return to your machine to normal reception mode until the next
time).
Off
—
Off
—
Off
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.22
3.22
3.56
3.55
3.55
3.56
3.25
3.32
3.11
3.13
3.14
3.29
3.Department Code
4.F-Code Box
5.Batch Tx
02.Erase Batch Box
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
D. Doc. Management 1.Store Document
2.Erase Document
—
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
03.Batch Document
01.Polling Document
02.F-Code Document
03.Batch Document
04.Security Rx Doc.
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.14
3.31
3.13
3.14
3.30, 3.31
3.12
3.Document Print
—
—
3.50
2.8
05.Com. Stored Doc.
Print the stored document for delayed transmission.
*4:These option appears only if the optional printer controller has been installed. For details see the operating instructions that is included with the printer controller kit.
1.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Page
Level one function
E. Print
Level two function Level three function
Summary of setting
Print a list of your machine settings.
Print a list of the fax settings.
Default setting
1.List Print
01.Machine Settings
02.Fax Settings
03.Copy Settings
04.Journal
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4.10
4.10
4.10
3.21
2.8
3.3
3.5
3.47
3.7
3.54
3.22
Print a list of the copy settings.
Print the activity journal manually.
Print a list of the delayed commands.
Print a list of the one-touch dial keys.
Print a list of the speed-dial numbers.
Print a list of the programmable one-touch keys.
Print a list of the group numbers.
05.Commands List
06.One-Touch List
07.Speed-Dial List
08.P One-Touch List
09.Group List
10.Block Junk Dial List Print a list of the blocked numbers.
11.Cover Page
Print a cover page.
12.Depart. Time List
Print a total communication time and printed pages of each
department code.
—
3.56
13.F-Code Box List
14.F-Code Doc. List
15.Batch Box List
16.Batch Doc. List
Print a list of F-Code boxes.
Print a list of the document stored in the F-Code boxes.
Print a list of Batch boxes.
Print a list of the document stored in the batch boxes.
Print a list of Macro keys.
Print the highlight features and functions of the printer.
Print all the status and configuration of the printer.
Print the list of all PCL fonts currently installed in the printer.
Print the NIC (network interface card) settings.
Scanning a document into the PC.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.28
3.28
3.12
3.12
3.19
—
—
—
—
—
17.Macros List
4
2.Printer Functions 01.Demo Page*
02.Status Page*
4
4
03.Font List*
3
04.NIC Status*
2
F. PC-FAX Commands*
1.PC-FAX
01.PC-FAX Scan
02.PC-FAX Initial
03.Set RS-232C
Initializing your machine.
Setting of the RS-232C parameters.
—
—
I. User Install
Set-up the following settings:
• Language on the LCD and Lists
• Current Day and Time
English
—
• Your TTI (your name)
—
1.18
• Subscriber ID (your fax number)
• Phone dialing type
• Fax reception mode
• Time for the machine to enter the sleep mode
—
Tone
Fax Ready
5 minutes
*2: This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed.
*3: This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.
*4:These option appears only if the optional printer controller has been installed. For details see the operating instructions that is included with the printer controller kit.
1.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
Initial settings
Initial setting software is already installed on your Konica fax machine. It guides
you through the process of entering your machine’s settings.
These settings you make here can always be changed later.
Entering initial settings
Important: If you press STOP during Initial settings, your fax machine returns to
standby mode (its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you
saved by pressing ENTER as described in these instructions.
Getting started
Determine the following before you go any further:
Press Program key,
I
,
ENTER.
1
The LCD shows the current language setting.
Language :English
The type of dialing your telephone system requires — Choose either tone or
pulse (rotary) dialing.
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
The name and fax number you want to appear on your faxes —
Press
or
until the language you want appears.
2
2
3
4
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of
text at the very top of the page. This text lists a name, called the Transmit
Terminal Identifier (TTI), and a fax number. The TTI cannot be longer than 22
characters.
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
The LCD now shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appear-
ing under the first digit.
Enter Time
Clearing stored settings
01/01 ’01 00:00
Before the Initial setting, clear your machine’s built-in user data memory. This
ensures the memory will hold only your settings.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct date and time, using a DDMMYY
format for the date and 24-hour format for the time. For instance, to set 8:30
PM on 11 July, 2002, press 1 1 0 7 0 2 2 0 3 0, which results in:
5
Important: After you set the Initial settings, do not clear the memory again
unless an authorized technician asks you to do so.
To clear the machine’s memory:
Enter Time
11/07 ’02 20:30
Press Program key, *, 2. The LCD now asks if you want to clear the memory:
1
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All
Clear User Settings
Check Enter/Cancel
you have to do is enter the digits.
To change a digit, press
to move the cursor left, or
to move it right.
Note: If you don’t want to clear the memory, just press CANCEL.
Then enter the correct digit.
If you do want to clear the memory, press ENTER.
Press ENTER to save the clock setting and continue.
2
6
1.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting started
The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on
other fax machines’ displays or printouts. The fax industry term for this
number is Subscriber ID.
The LCD now asks you to enter the time for the sleep mode. Your machine will
7
8
17
automatically enter sleep mode after your selected idle time has elapsed.
Sleep Mode Timing
(001-240):005
Your Fax Number
Enter the time (in minutes) using the numeric keypad.
18
19
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number. The number may contain up
to 20 characters.
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine will return to standby mode.
Your Fax Number
9725555525_
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase to the left.
To change just one number, press to move left, or
to move right.
Press CANCEL to erase the number. Then re-enter the fax number cor-
rectly.
Press ENTER to save the number.
9
10
The LCD now asks you to enter the name you want to appear at the top of
faxes you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.
Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.
(Refer to “Entering characters” on page 1.12.)
Your Name ;Upper
_
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
11
12
The LCD now shows the type of dialling:
Phone Type
:Tone
/ /Enter
← →
Press ENTER and continue.
13
14
The LCD now shows the machine’s current reception mode.
Fax Ready
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
For now, press
or
until the setting Fax Ready appears. (This setting can
15
16
always be changed. We’ll discuss reception modes further on pages 2.10–2.11.)
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
1.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic
operation of the transmission,
reception and copying
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Using your fax machine as a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending faxes
How to set the document
Guidelines
You can send a fax message using the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or platen
glass. Before you begin the fax sending, please read the following guidelines.
When setting the documents in the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Insert your document(s) face
1
Acceptable document sizes
You can set up to 50 sheets of A4-, A5 - or F4−sized document in the ADF at one
time. However, it’s possible to fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad sheet or one
up to 1 meter long.
up, top edge first. If you’re
sending a multi-page docu-
ments, “fan” the pages slightly.
Adjust the document width
2
The acceptable dimensions (width × length) are:
guide to fit your documents.
Automatic document feeder (ADF)
SINGLE-SHEET
MULTIPLE-SHEET
Maximum: 216 × 900 mm
Minimum: 120 × 100 mm
Maximum: 216 × 356 mm
Minimum: 210 × 148 mm
Note: The ADF can hold up to 50 pages of normal weight paper.
When setting the documents on the Platen glass
Platen glass
Maximum: 216 × 356 mm
Make sure the document is not
in the ADF.
1
Things not to put in your fax
To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, don’t insert:
• Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages
• Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid
• “Sticky notes” (or documents with “sticky notes” attached)
• Cardboard, newspaper or fabric
• Pages with duplicating carbon on either side
• Credit cards or any small, thick items
• OHP transparency film
Lift the platen cover.
2
Set your document face down
3
on the platen glass. The docu-
ment should be aligned to the
front right corner.
Gently close the platen cover.
4
Important: Gently close the platen cover so that you don’t catch your
hands, possibly injuring them.
2.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Resolution, grayscale
Mixing resolution and contrast in a multiple page
When you send the document with more than one page, you can select different res-
olutions and contrasts for each page.
Insert your documents, select resolution and contrast for first page, dial and press
START. Then follow one of the following two procedures.
Reviewing resolution and grayscale:
• Normal resolution (“NORM” on the control panel) is suitable for most typed
documents and simple drawings.
• Fine resolution (“FINE” on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-
When the document is placed in the ADF:
cated drawings, floorplans or handwritten documents.
• Superfine resolution (“S-FINE” on the control panel, “S Fine” on the LCD)
Select resolution and contrast before the next page is scanned.
reproduces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.
When the document is placed on the platen glass:
• Grayscale mode (“HALFTONE” on the control panel; “Gray” on the LCD) captures
shades in photos and drawings.
Remove the previous page and place the next page.
1
2
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older models)
receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in grayscale mode
to virtually any fax machine currently in use.
Select resolution and contrast. Then press NEXT DOC.
HALFTONE
Dialing pause
S-FINE
Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and pauses can also be useful
when you’re dialing through special telephone exchanges.
To insert a pause, assign REDIAL/PAUSE to a Soft key (see page 3.16), and then press
REDIAL/PAUSE. (The pause character (-/) will appear on the LCD.) Each pause
entered lasts for a factory-set two seconds.
To change the resolution setting, press RESOLUTION repeatedly.
FINE
A glowing LED indicates the fax is using the setting named by
NORMAL
that LED. For example, in the drawing (right), the machine is set
for FINE resolution.
DOCUMENT
RESOLUTION
For example, pressing 9, REDIAL/PAUSE, 19725552009 dials 9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7
2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.
Helpful Tip: You can change the dialing pause length within 2 to 10 seconds.
Contrast
(see “Changing the pause length,” page 4.5.)
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or dark-
ness, as the case may be, of document pages you are sending or copying.
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail
DARK
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And any
service — such as voice mail — which may intercept your calls can keep your fax
machine from receiving fax calls.
If you use only one line for both phone and fax, consult your telephone company to
see how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while using the fax
machine.
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRAST repeatedly.
NORMAL
A glowing LED indicates the fax is using the setting named by
that LED.
LIGHT
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just
remember — “Light lightens” and “Dark darkens” — to
keep it straight.
CONTRAST
2.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Memory transmission
Quick memory transmission
Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:
Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard memory trans-
missions.
Save Time. By using your fax machine’s memory, you won’t have to wait for your
machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your
machine’s memory, and you can walk away with your original in hand.
For a normal memory transmission, your fax: (1) scans your entire document into
memory, (2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.
Save Money. If you’re transmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your
machine will send the document directly into the other machine’s memory and hang
up. (The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the
call has ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.
But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn’t wait to scan all pages
into memory before dialing. After it scans the first page of your document, your
machine dials the call. While dialing, connecting and transmitting, your fax
machine continues to scan in the remaining pages of the document.
Save Even More Money. Set up a delayed transmission (see page 3.10) to send
your document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges
will be cheaper.
The quick memory transmission is On for default setting. However, you can turn off
it for the default. (See page 4.2.)
Important: To use Quick Memory transmission, the memory transmission feature
Note: Some documents use up memory more quickly than others. They include
documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the
machine’s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.
must be turned on.
The memory transmission default setting is On. However, you can turn it off for the
default. (See page 4.2.)
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission)
In the following cases, the machine does not use its memory for sending a fax:
• When you turned off the memory transmission
Helpful tip: If you will frequently turn this feature on and off, you can assign a
Soft key (see page 3.16) to turn on or off by simply pressing that key.
• When you are sending a fax using MONITOR/CALL key.
• When the machine’s memory is full
Memory overflow message
In normal memory transmission, if you’ve stored too much information in your
machine’s memory, a “Memory Overflow” message may appear on the LCD:
It is called Real time transmission mode. In this mode, the next page is not scanned
in while the current page is being transmitted.
Note: In this mode, only one destination can be dialed.
Note: Real time transmission available only when using the ADF. When transmit-
ting use the platen glass, the machine always uses Memory transmission
mode even if you set the memory transmission to off.
Memory Overflow
Start Or Cancel
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine
to remember.
If this message appears, press START to tell your fax to keep as many pages in mem-
ory as possible, or press CANCEL to erase from memory all pages stored during the
current operation (but not previous operations).
Note: If you don’t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine automati-
cally erase the document stored in the memory during the current
operation.
Dividing a large document into smaller batches will help you avoid this error.
2.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending a fax using the ADF
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.
6
• If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the
first page of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it
makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory
while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document
into memory. (In default setting, the Quick Memory transmission is On. If
you want to turn off this feature, see page 4.2.)
• If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your fax scans the
entire document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes con-
tact, your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.
• If the fax is set for Real time transmit (non-memory transmission), your
machine simply dials the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine
feeds the document through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.
Press COPY/FAX to change to Fax mode.
1
2
Note: The more “stuff” (called black coverage) your machine “sees” on a
page, the more slowly the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And
even if the page is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or at
certain resolutions makes your machine “see” more “stuff.”
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.
Insert the document face up, top edge first. And adjust the document
guides — by sliding either of them to the left or right — to fit the page(s)
you’ll be faxing. Your fax machine’s ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) will
hold up to 50 pages with A4-sized paper.
When a document is in the feeder, the LCD shows the scanning width and the
amount of memory available:
Important: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-
ment, press the STOP key.
Document Ready
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review
Commands function. See “Reviewing or canceling commands,”
page 2.7.
A4
Mem100%
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
7
Enter the fax number.
919725552009
** Complete **
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone
call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for
long-distance.)
Important: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the
remote fax. The line may even be blank.
Press Start
919725552009_
Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 2.6.
Press START.
5
By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:
== Command:01 ==
You’ll need to know this command number if you later wish to cancel the
transmission or to print a stored document (see pages 2.7–2.8).
2.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Sending a fax using the platen glass
Enter the fax number.
7
8
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone
call. (Example: Enter 9 to “dial out” from an office telephone system, or 1 for
long-distance.)
Press Start
919725552009_
Press START
.
By pressing START, you’ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:
== Command:01 ==
You’ll need this command number to cancel the transmission or to print a
stored document (see pages 2.7–2.8).
Press COPY/FAX to change to Fax mode.
1
2
3
4
Then your machine will scan the document into the memory.
While your machine scans the document, the LCD will show:
If there’s a document in the ADF, remove it.
919725552009
A4 NextDoc Mem100%
Open the platen cover.
Place the document face down on the platen glass and align it with the doc-
When the scanning is done, the LCD will show:
ument scale on the right, then gently close the platen cover.
9
The document should be aligned to the right front corner.
→
Start Scan NextDoc
Important: Gently close the platen cover so that you don’t catch your
hands, possibly injuring them.
→
Tx Start
Start
When a thick document, such as a book, is on the platen glass,
do not press strongly from the top of the platen cover. This
may break the platen glass and cause an injury.
If you want to send more pages, proceed to step 10.
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.
Place the next page, then press NEXT DOC to start scanning.
10
11
Press DOCUMENT SIZE to select the document size, A4, A5 or F4.
Note: If necessary, select the document size (see step 5).
5
To send any more pages, repeat steps 9-10.
Otherwise, press START to start the transmission, and skip to step 11.
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one you’re dialing.
When it makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from
memory.
Important: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the docu-
ment, press the STOP key.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
6
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review
Commands function. See “Reviewing or canceling commands,”
page 2.7.
2.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
Redialing
12
919725552009
** Complete **
Automatically fax redialing
If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In this Auto Redial
Important: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on
the top line of the display depends on information stored in the
remote fax. The line may even be blank.
mode, your fax automatically redials the number up to two times at one minute inter-
vals.
Note: You can change the redial time and interval settings. (See “Changing redial
Note: If the call fails, see “Redialing,” page 2.6.
settings,” page 4.5.)
While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can
make as many as 99 fax transmissions.
Sending a fax using MONITOR/CALL key
You also can fax a document using the monitor speaker to dial the call.
Note: In this function, you cannot send a fax using the platen glass.
Note: If you used the MONITOR/CALL key to dial the call, you must redial manually
(see below).
Note: If the last redial attempt fails, your machine may print (and/or display)
error messages.
Insert the document to the ADF.
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Redialing manually
You can always redial calls manually. And you must redial manually if you used the
Obtain a dial tone by pressing MONITOR/CALL
MONITOR/CALL key to dial the failed call.
In either case, the LCD shows:
Note: To use the REDIAL/PAUSE key, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance.
(See page 3.16.)
** Tel Mode **
_
To redial a fax call manually without using the MONITOR/CALL key:
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.
Set the document and set the resolution and contrast.
4
1
2
Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
** Tel Mode **
919725552009_
View Redial History
0:1234567890
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
5
6
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
3
4
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:
Press START.
919725552009
** Complete **
To redial a fax call manually with the MONITOR/CALL key:
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press
MONITOR/CALL to hang up. Or if you’ve pressed START to begin the fax
transmission, press STOP to end it.
Make sure the document is in the ADF and that the resolution and contrast
are set.
1
2
Also see “Redialing manually,” below, if the call fails.
Press MONITOR/CALL to get a dial tone.
2.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Reviewing or cancelling commands
Your fax machine can store many “jobs” in its memory. And it keeps track of each
one by assigning it a command number, like “C01.”
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
3
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in
your fax machine’s memory and given a command number. Your machine can store
up to 99 delayed commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number rang-
ing from 01 to 99.
The Review Commands function gives you the power to check on each job (or
command) in your machine’s memory. It also lets you cancel a command if you
decide not to send the document.
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
4
5
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.
To redial a voice call manually using the telephone which is connected to your
fax machine:
To see your machine’s stored commands or to cancel them:
Lift the telephone’s handset to get a dial tone.
Press COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM. The LCD will show:
1
2
1
C01:5552009
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
/ /ꢂ/Cancel
ꢀ ꢁ
View Redial History
0:1234567890
• The LCD shows the first command, indicated by its command number and
the phone number it will dial.
Your machine can memory the latest 10 dial numbers. Press
dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until the
• If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears on
3
4
the display.
Press START.
Note: If you do not have any stored commands in your machine, the LCD will
When the other person answers, use the telephone’s handset to speak to that
person.
show:
No Command
Press STOP to return to the standby mode.
Or, if you want to see the result of the fax transaction, press COMM.
CANCEL/CONFIRM. (See “View the result of fax transaction” on page
2.9.)
Here, you see command 01, followed by the number it’s set to dial. If the com-
mand is to send a broadcast, “Broadcast” appears instead of the phone
number. (See “Broadcasting,” page 3.9.)
If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCD shows its batch box
number (such as “B01”) rather than the command number. (See “Batch trans-
mission,” pages 3.11–3.13.)
If the command is for a Call group dialing, the group number (such as “G01”)
appears instead of the phone number. (See “Call group dialing,” page 3.7.)
Press
or
to scroll through currently stored commands.
2
2.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Printing a delayed command list
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
3
4
Your machine can print a command list which tells you:
• The command’s identification number
C01:9-5552311
Check / /ꢂ/Cancel
ꢀ ꢁ
• The phone number, or “remote location”
• The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:MM format)
To go ahead with canceling the command, press CANCEL again. Go back to
step 2 to view other delayed commands.
• A “note” telling if the command is a polling or F-Code operation (see pages
To keep this command but to continue reviewing stored commands, press
or . Go back to step 2.
3.14–3.15 for more on polling and 3.25–3.34 for more on F-Code communication).
To print a delayed command list, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 5 ENTER.
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOP to return
your machine to standby mode.
Note: See also “Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast,” below.
Printing a stored document
Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission.
To print a stored document, you’ll need to know the document’s command number,
which you can get by either reviewing the commands or printing a delayed com-
mand list (see above).
Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:
Press COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM.
1
2
Press Program key, D, 3, 0, 5 ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Press
or
to scroll through currently stored broadcast command.
Com. Stored Doc.
Note: Stop this operation at any time by pressing STOP
.
Command No.
:_
C01:Broadcast
Use the numeric keypad to enter the command’s identification number, 1–99.
/ /ꢂ/Cancel
ꢀ ꢁ
2
3
For example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 1:
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL, CANCEL.
3
4
Com. Stored Doc.
Command No.
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.
:1_
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press
to see the first number. The LCD shows:
(or BROADCAST)
9-5550388
/ /ꢃ/Cancel
ꢀ ꢁ
Press
or
until you find the number you want to cancel.
5
6
Press CANCEL, CANCEL. The next number will appear.
If you want to cancel this number, also, repeat this step.
If you want to cancel a different number, go back to step 5.
If you want to go back to reviewing or canceling other command, press
.
If you don’t want to cancel any more numbers, press STOP. The machine
returns to standby mode.
2.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
View the result of fax transaction
You can see 70 most recent fax transactions and result of each transactions with the
following information.
• Assigned number, starting each day at 001
• Remote location called (The destination name)
• Starting date and time
• Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM commu-
nication. If preceded by a pound (#), this signifies communication was via the
highspeed V.34 modem.
Note: Your machine’s LCD shortens the word Transmission to Tx and the Reception
to Rx.
Press COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM. twice. The LCD shows:
1
Communication Result
Comm.Cancel/Enter
Note: If you want to go back to the previous display,
press COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM.
Press ENTER. The LCD will show the latest fax transaction.
2
Tx001:ABC
OK 10/12 10:26
ꢁ
Press
or
until the transaction you want appears.
3
4
Note: You can print a result of the fax transaction appears on the LCD by
pressing ENTER.
If you wish to exit this mode, press STOP.
Printing all result of daily fax transactions:
If you want to print all results of fax transactions, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 4
ENTER.
Note: You can set your machine to print all results of faxing automatically.
See “Setting the Activity journal” on pages 3.20–3.21 for more details.
2.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Receiving faxes
Answering calls manually
Reception modes
Your fax machine has five different reception modes — Tel Ready, Fax Ready,
Fax/Tel Ready, Tel/Fax Ready and Ans/Fax Ready. We’ll explain each of these in
this section.
In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if a telephone is con-
nected to your machine. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.
Tel Ready mode
If you hear someone speaking to you, use your tele-
phone to speak back.
Use it if:
• You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls
and
• On that line, you’re using at least one other phone which is not
connected to your fax machine
or
• On that line, you’re using at least one other phone which is not
connected to your fax machine
If you hear fax tones (“beep — beep — beep”),
press START and hang up your telephone.
The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.
In this mode: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically. You must
answer each call and if you hear a fax tone, press START on your fax
machine to receive a fax message.
Fax Ready mode
Use it if:
Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn’t share it with a
phone or an answering machine.
Answering fax calls using another phone, not connected to your
fax machine
In this mode: Your fax machine answers each call and attempts to receive a fax.
If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and a telephone
attached to your fax, there’s no need to run to the fax machine to answer every call.
If you happen to answer a fax call while you’re at another extension, put the hand-
set down, but don’t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and pick up the telephone
which is connected to the fax machine. Then press START.
Fax/Tel Ready mode
Use it if:
• A telephone is connected directly to your fax machine
and
• You’re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone
In this mode: Your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a
regular voice call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the
end of each reception.)
After you press START, hang up both the telephone’s handsets. Because remote fax
machines will wait several seconds to hear reception tones from your unit, you have
about 30 seconds to walk to your fax, pick up the handset, and press START.
If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a
special ring. If you hear it, answer using your phone.
Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won’t turn off ringers on other telephones in your
house or office. Other phones won’t distinguish between fax and voice calls.
2.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Tel/Fax Ready mode
How to select the fax reception mode:
Use it if:
• A telephone is connected directly to your fax machine
Press Program key, I, and then press ENTER seven times. The LCD shows your
current fax reception mode:
1
and
• You’re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine
Fax Ready
In this mode: Your fax machine rings the number of times you’ve identified in the
user settings (the default setting is two times). If you don’t answer
the call, your fax machine answers the call. If a caller sends a fax,
your machine begins receiving it. If a voice call comes in, your
machine detects it and sounds a special ring, telling you to answer a
call.
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Press
or
until your desired reception mode is appeared.
2
3
Fax/Tel Ready
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Ans/Fax Ready mode
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Use it if:
You’re using an answering machine that’s connected directly to your
fax machine.
If the paper runs out while fax reception
When your machine runs out of paper, it beeps, the red light
of the printer status lights glows and the LCD shows which
source has run out of paper – the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette
(optional) or the bypass tray.
In this mode: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each
call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record
the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it
begins receiving the fax message.
Using an answering machine with your fax machine
In this example, the machine runs out of paper in 1st cassette:
To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:
Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready, as described on right column.
1st Cassette
1
2
Please Supply Paper
Set your answering machine to answer calls after no more than two rings.
(See the answering machine’s instructions if necessary.)
Helpful Tip: If the A4, A5 or F4 sized paper has been set in the bypass tray, your
machine uses it when running out of paper in the paper cassette(s)
during fax reception. Your machine’s bypass tray can hold up to 50
sheets of the paper.
Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.
Here’s a suggested message:
3
Your fax machine cannot print fax messages without paper. But it can still receive
documents into its memory, as described in the section below.
Hello! You’ve reached [your name or telephone number]. To leave a voice
message, please wait for the beep. To send a fax, press START on your fax
machine. Thanks for calling!
Out-of-paper reception
If your machine runs out of paper, it stores up to 250 fax receptions in its memory.
This is called out-of-paper reception. Once you refill the paper supply, the fax
machine prints the stored messages automatically.
Important: Your answering machine’s outgoing message must be no longer
than 10 seconds.
Detection of “silent” fax machines
Some older fax machines don’t send fax tones when transmitting, which can cause
problems when using an answering machine with your fax.
But your fax machine can accommodate these “silent” machines without disrupting
your answering machine operation.
Note: The number of pages (not receptions) your fax machine can store for
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:
• Your machine’s memory capacity
• Types of documents being sent to your machine
• Resolution of documents being sent to your machine
2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Making copies
Your machine’s copier features
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the platen glass face
2
down just as you would to send a fax.
Your machine has the following copier features:
• Single copy (see the right column on this page)
• Stacking multiple copies (see page 2.13)
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
3
4
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
• Enter the number of copies
• Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
• Sorting multiple copies (see page 2.13)
• Enlarged or reduced copies (see page 2.13)
• Negative/positive copy (Reverse black and white areas) (see page 2.17)
Note: For details about each item, see “Making copy settings,” pages
2.15–2.16.
Basic copy procedure
Press START.
5
Press COPY/FAX to change to
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPY RESET.
1
Copy mode.
COPY/FAX key
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.
Single copy
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the platen glass face
down just as you would to send a fax.
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCD shows:
Number of copies
If you are using platen glass, enter the document size by pressing the
3
DOCUMENT SIZE.
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Recording paper size
Document size
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
• Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
4
Note: If you want to enlarge copy, use the platen glass.
Note: For details about each item, see “Making copy settings,” pages
Press START.
2.15–2.16
5
2.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Stacking multiple copies
Press START.
7
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.
1
2
Press SORT to turn the sort setting off.
Note: The default setting for sorting is On. To change the default setting,
Enlarged or reduced copies
Your fax machine is capable of enlargement and reduction when copying.
see page 4.7.
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the platen glass face
down just as you would to send a fax.
3
Note: The copy enlargement and reduction rate setting is available only for copy-
ing, not for faxing.
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
4
5
6
Important: Copy enlargement is available only for copying using the platen glass;
it is not available for copying using the ADF.
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the platen glass face
down just as you would send a fax.
• Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Note: If you want to enlarged copy, use the platen glass.
Note: For details about each items, see “Making copy settings,” pages
2.15–2.16.
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
3
4
Press START.
7
Choose an enlargement or reduction ratio using
or
of the cursor key.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.
You can reduce to 86%, 81%, 70% or 50 % of the original size
—OR—
You can enlarge to 115%, 122%, 141% or 200 %
—OR—
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF)
Note: You cannot use the platen glass for sorting multiple copies.
Press ZOOM to turn the ZOOM light on, and adjust the ratio at 1% steps using
or
of the cursor key. You can enter the ratio between 50% and 200%.
—OR—
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.
1
2
Directly enter any percentage between 50 % and 200 % by following proce-
dure.
1. Press #.
Make sure the LED on SORT glows, which means the sort setting is turned on.
Note: If the LED does not glow, press SORT to turn it on.
2. Using the numeric key to enter your desired ratio (50 to 200).
3. Press # again.
Place your original document in ADF face up, just as you would to send a fax.
3
4
5
6
→
141%: A5 A4
Set the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
→
122%: A5
B5JIS
→
115%: B5JIS
A4
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).
→
86%: A4
B5JIS
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
→
81%: B5JIS
A5
→
70%: A4 A5
• Set copy reduction ratio
Note: For details about each items, see “Making the copy settings,” page 2.15.
2.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Helpful Tip: You can set the copy reduction or enlargement ratio to “Auto”.
Press BYPASS to change the paper size. The LCD will show:
(See “Setting copy auto,” page 4.7.) If the “Auto” is set and you
set the document size by pressing DOCUMENT SIZE, the machine
automatically reduce or enlarge the original size (you entered)
to fit on the paper size you selected.
4
5
6
Set Bypass Ppr:A4
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
If your recording paper in the bypass tray is A4, A5 or F4, proceed to step 6.
Otherwise, skip to the step 7.
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
• Enter the number of copies
5
6
Note: When you use transparency film, skip to step 8 and select “OHP” in
step 9.
Press START.
Press
or
until your desired recording paper size appears. Here, we’ve
chosen A5
:
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPY RESET.
Set Bypass Ppr:A5
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.
Skip to step 9.
Press or until “Other” appears.
Using the bypass tray
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine’s paper
cassette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency
film), use the bypass tray.
7
Set Bypass Ppr:Other
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
ꢁ
Important: If loading transparency (OHP) film into the bypass tray, be sure that
the sheet is designed for laser printers and not for copiers. Also, be
sure that the film does not have a paper backing and/or a leading
strip. If it does, remove the paper backing and/or strip before insert-
ing. Only film should go in, not film with any backing or strip.
Then press
or ENTER. You will see:
Set Bypass Ppr:Exe
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
ꢀ
Either insert the document in the ADF or place it on the platen glass.
Press
or
until your desired recording paper size appears. Here, we’ve
1
2
8
chosen Postcard:
Set the paper in the bypass tray.
Set Bypass Ppr:Post
See the table of “Acceptable paper size and cassette capacity” on page 1.8 and
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
ꢀ
“Loading paper in bypass tray” on page 1.10 for more information.
Note: Place the original document in the same orientation as the paper in
Press ENTER.
9
10
11
the paper source.
If necessary, select desired resolution, contrast, reduction/enlargement ratio.
Press START to begin the copying process.
The machine will select the bypass tray for the paper
source and the LCD will show the default paper size you
selected in step 6 on page 1.10.
If you want to change it, proceed to step 4.
Otherwise, skip to step 10.
3
Copy Ready
[ A4 ] A4
1
100%
2.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Memory overflow message
If you’ve stored too much information in your machine’s memory, a “Memory
Overflow” message may appear on the LCD:
Making copy settings
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCD shows:
Number of copies
Memory Overflow
Start Or Cancel
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio
Recording paper size
Document size
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory, or (2)
the pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine
to remember.
If this message appears, press START to tell your machine to copy as many pages in
memory, or press CANCEL to delete from memory all pages stored during the current
operation (but not previous operations).
Note: If you don’t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine will auto-
matically print the document stored in the memory during the current
operation.
Number of pages
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for the document.
Copy reduction or enlargement rate
Your fax machine can make enlarged and reduced copies. For more information, see
“Enlarged or reduced copies,” pages 2.13–2.14.
If the paper runs out while copying
When your machine runs out of paper, it beeps, the red light
of the printer status lights glows and the LCD shows which
source has run out of paper – the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette
(optional) or the bypass tray.
Document size
To select the document size manually, press DOCUMENT SIZE repeatedly until your
desired document size appears. You can choose the A4, A5 or F4:
In this example, the machine runs out of the paper in the 1st
cassette:
1st Cassette
Please Supply Paper
If you want to cancel the current copying job, press STOP. Otherwise, supply the
paper to displayed paper source to resume the copying.
Note: When the document size is set to “Auto” (see “Setting copy auto,” page 4.7)
you may see the LCD as below:
Copy Ready
[ A4 ] A4
1
100%
[
] means the machine automatically select the document size.
Note: According to the magnification ratio or recording paper size, the document
size will be not displayed:
Copy Ready
-----
1
50%
A4
2.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Recording paper size
Adjust image contrast
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive light or darkness, of
the document pages you are copying.
As default, your machine selects the paper source automatically, however if you
wish to select the paper source manually, press PAPER SIZE repeatedly until your
desired paper size is displayed. The LCD toggles the paper size in the 1st cassette,
2nd cassette (if installed), the bypass tray and Auto select mode.
DARK
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRAST repeatedly.
NORMAL
A glowing LED indicates the machine is using the setting named
by that LED.
LIGHT
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just
remember — “Light lightens” and “Dark darkens” — to
keep it straight.
CONTRAST
Note: If the bypass tray has no paper, the LCD shows “None” for the paper size of
the bypass tray.
Note: When you choose the auto paper select mode, the LCD
shows “Auto” and the all LED of the paper source will
be lit.
However, if the bypass tray has no paper and the
optional 2nd paper cassette has not been installed,
the machine will show the “ [(paper size)] ” instead
of “Auto” although you select auto paper select mode.
And it lights the LED of the paper source that can be
used only.
Select Document type
PHOTO
PHOTO
•
•
•
PHOTO — Select this mode when copying photographs or
/TEXT
drawings.
TEXT
PHOTO/TEXT — Select this mode when copying documents
containing photographs or drawings with letters.
TEXT — Select this mode when copying letters.
DOCUMENT
RESOLUTION
To select the document type, press DOCUMENT repeatedly.
A glowing LED indicates the machine is using the setting named by that LED.
2.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas)
If using this feature, the black and white areas of the original are reversed.
Note: You cannot combine this feature with Reduced or Enlarged copies.
Copy protection
With such a versatile copier built right into your fax machine, you might want to
make sure it doesn’t become too tempting to unauthorized copying that could
deplete your machine’s supplies more rapidly. So, to limit the use of your fax
machine to only sending and receiving faxes — in other words, to activate copy pro-
tection:
Helpful tip: If you programmed a Soft key to turn on or off this feature, simply
pressing that key will turn on or off this feature.
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
2
3
4
1
Copy Protect
:Off
Place your original document in ADF face up, or on the platen glass face down.
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENT SIZE.
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
3
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Nega/Posi
:Off
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Copy Protect
:On
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Note: This feature is Off for default setting. However, you can turn it on for
Press ENTER to save the setting.
the default. (See page 4.7.)
Copy Protect
** Complete **
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
5
6
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Nega/Posi
:On
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Whenever someone tries to change the machine to Copy mode, the machine will
sound a brief alarm tone and display:
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode
with following display:
Fax Ready
Copy Off
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1
To turn copy protection to use the machine’s copying function, repeat steps 1-3, in
A4
Auto 100%
step 2, you press
so that the display shows:
As needed, set the following:
• Select document type and adjust image contrast
• Enter the number of copies
Copy Protect
:Off
7
8
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter
Press START.
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPY RESET.
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.
2.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
Using your fax machine as a phone
Your fax machine can also be used as a phone, if a telephone is connected to your fax
machine. The following is a brief look at the machine’s telephone features.
Important: Your machine’s monitor speaker is not a speaker phone. If a person
answers the call, pick up the telephone’s handset to speak.
Note: If the call fails, press MONITOR/CALL to hang up.
Dialing a telephone number
Redial
Pick up the telephone’s handset which is connected to your fax machine.
You will hear a dial tone.
1
Note: To use REDIAL/PAUSE key, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance. (See
page 3.16.)
Dial the number by the using numeric keypad.
2
Lift the telephone’s handset which is connected directly to your fax machine
to get a dial tone.
— or —
1
Press the one-touch key. (See “One-touch phone dialing,” on page 3.4.)
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
2
— or —
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX once, then press the three digit speed-dial num-
ber. (See “Phoning via speed-dial,” on page 3.6.)
— or —
Your machine can remember the latest 10 dial numbers. Press
the dial number you want to redial appears.
or
until
3
4
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice, then search the name you want to call
using the cursor key, then press START. (See “Telephone Index dialing,” page
3.8.)
Press START.
When the other person answers, use the telephone to speak to that person.
When the other person answers, begin speaking.
3
Changing the dialing type
On-hook dialing
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the
handset.
If, with your machine set for “pulse” dialing, you must enter tones (“DTMF”) during a
call, press DIALING OPTIONS once (the “–!” symbol will be shown on the LCD). Your
machine now will “tone” dial all subsequent numbers.
Note: To use DIALING OPTIONS key, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance.
Press MONITOR/CALL. You’ll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker
(See page 3.16.)
1
volume to Off; see page 1.8), and the LCD shows:
Note: Using this key enables tone transmission from the numeric keypad after the
call is connected. When you hang up the call, your machine will return to
“pulse” dialing for the next call.
** Tel Mode **
_
Dial the number you want. Use either the numeric keypad, a one-touch key, a
speed-dial number or telephone index to dial.
2
2.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic operation
This page is intentionally blank.
2.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Features
This chapter describes
convenient features of your
machine.
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Autodialer
Your fax machine’s autodialer stores your most frequently called phone and fax
numbers for instant recall so you don’t have to remember them. It’s something like
an electronic phone book.
Special Dialing Characters
Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters when programming
the autodialer. These characters include hyphens, which make phone numbers eas-
ier to read, and special characters needed for international calls.
The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what
keys to press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialer:
Autodialer basics
Note: To use the DIALING OPTIONS or REDIAL/PAUSE key, you should assign it to a
How do you autodial?
There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how
you dial them:
Soft key in advance. (See page 3.16.)
Char. What it does
Enters a pause. Each pause lasts two
Keystroke(s)
Type
How to dial
Amount stored
REDIAL/PAUSE
One-touch
Press one of the keys, marked 01–55
on the left side of the control panel
55
seconds (or whatever length you set; see
page 4.5). Each pause uses two of the
characters you can store in one phone
number.
[after you enter at least one
other character]
–/
Speed-dial
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a
three-digit identifier, from 001 to 145
145
Total amount of numbers stored
200
Makes long numbers easier to read.
Doesn’t change fax machine operation.
DIALING OPTIONS (once)
–
/
!
Location IDs and the Telephone Index dialing
When you store numbers in your autodialer, you can give these numbers descriptive
names, such as “Chicago office” or “Billing department”. Your machine calls this
name a Location ID.
Your machine’s autodialer sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your
Telephone Index dialing, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names,
just as if you were using a phone book.
We’ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages.
The Telephone Index dialing is discussed in detail on page 3.8.
Enter “flash” signal to exchange PBX
to PSTN before actual phone number.
“/” must be entered to the first of number.
DIALING OPTIONS (twice)
Enter “dial prefix” to access to alternative
telephone network. “!” must be entered to
the first of number.
DIALING OPTIONS (3 times)
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not
tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-
dialing to tone (“DTMF”)-dialing. Use after
the actual phone number but before any
characters (such as a long-distance
carrier’s access code) which must be in
DTMF tone. Do not use on a tone line.
Call groups
DIALING OPTIONS (4 times)
–!
As you set up your autodialer, you may also want to set up call groups. These are sets
of phone numbers that make it easy to send the same fax to many different loca-
tions. For example, one call group may include all of your clients in one city, another
group may include all of your employees and another may include all your vendors.
Your fax machine can store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 call groups.
See also “Call group dialing,” page 3.7.
3.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you do want to enter or change this Location ID, go on to step 7.
Using one-touch keys
If you do not want to enter or change this Location ID, skip to step 8.
Your fax machine stores up to 55 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01–55.
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review
“Entering characters”, page 1.12.) A number’s Location ID may be up to 24
characters in length.
7
Entering or changing a one-touch number
Press Program key, A, 1, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the empty one-touch
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
1
8
9
number.
The LCD now displays:
Select One-Touch
01:No Number Stored
02:Group No.
_
02:Group No.
2,6_
or
Note: If a one-touch number other than 01 appears on the LCD, it means
that you have already entered a number for 01.
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
“Call groups,” page 3.1.)
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a
previously stored number. Here, we’ve selected 02 and the LCD shows either:
2
If you do want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 10.
If you do not want to enter or change this number’s call group, go to step 11.
Select One-Touch
02:No Number Stored
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.
10
Note: If you want to select a different one-touch key, press that key now.
Here, we’ve entered 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this one-touch number, the LCD now shows either:
3
4
02:Group No.
3_
02:Fax Number
_
02:Fax Number
9-1-555-987-6543_
or
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a
comma after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP.
For example, if you enter 3, GROUP, 1, 6, GROUP, 2, 7 to assign this one-touch
number to Call Groups 3, 16 and 27, the LCD shows:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may
want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 3.1.) The number can be up
to 40 characters in length:
02:Group No.
3,16,27_
02:Fax Number
9-/1-5559292039_
Helpful tip: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
Press ENTER.
Your LCD can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
11
The LCD will display the next empty one-touch number.
If you want to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 3.
If you do not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do
want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
5
6
The LCD now shows:
02:Name
_
;Upper
02:Name
S. W. Region Office_
;Lower
Use the autodialer labels in your fax’s packaging to write down the stored numbers
for easy reference.
or
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be
able to find it in the Telephone Index dialing (see page 3.8).
3.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a one-touch number
One-touch fax dialing
To dial a fax call using a one-touch number:
Press Program key, A, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the one-touch number
you have already entered:
1
Place the the document in the ADF, or on the platen glass.
1
2
Select One-Touch
01:9-1-555-345-6789
If you are using the platen glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
Note: If the one-touch number that appears is other than 01, it means that
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
01 is empty.
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number.
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase.
Here, we’ve selected 02:
2
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or
real time transmission:
Select One-Touch
02:9-1-555-987-6543
If you specified Quick Memory transmission:
• Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
If you want to erase a number stored in a different one-touch key than what
3
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
• While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
4
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
02:Erase One-Touch
Check Enter/Cancel
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number
you’ve selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase One-Touch
** Complete **
If you specified normal memory transmission:
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
• Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory first, then dials the
other fax machine.
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Printing a list of one-touch numbers
Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-
touch numbers. The list includes each key’s number, the Location ID (if any),
fax/telephone number and group number(s) you’ve stored in the key.
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Note:If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the document directly from
memory. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
To print a list of one-touch numbers, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
3.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you specified real time transmission:
• Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Using speed-dial numbers
Your fax machine will store up to 145 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit
identifier codes from 001 through 145.
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Entering or changing a speed-dial number
Press Program key, A, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows an empty speed-dial
1
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-
ner, transmitting as it goes. (To review Real time transmission, see page 2.3.)
number:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:No Number Stored
Note: If a speed-dial number other than 001 appears on the LCD, it means
One-touch phone dialing
you have already entered a number for 001.
To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have a telephone attached
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial number’s three-digit
identifier code. Here, we’ve entered 005 and the LCD shows either:
2
to your machine.
To make the call:
Enter Speed-Dial No. Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:No Number Stored or 005:9-555-397-0123
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
• Lift the handset
1
Important: When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers less
than 100, you must enter leading zeros to make three digits.
For example, 001-099.
• Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
Press the one-touch key in which you’ve stored the number. As the machine
dials, it shows the number on the LCD:
2
If you want to select a different speed-dial number, press that number’s three-
digit identifier code now. That number appears on the LCD.
3
** Tel Mode **
9-555-2842_
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for
this speed-dial number, the LCD now shows either:
4
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialed by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to
the person that answers.
005:Fax Number
_
005:Fax Number
9-555-397-0123_
or
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may
want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 3.1.)
5
6
hang up.
The number can be up to 40 characters in length:
005:Fax Number
9-1-555-567-1234_
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER to store it.
3.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
The LCD now shows:
Press ENTER.
7
8
12
The LCD will display the next empty speed-dial number.
If you want to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.
If you do not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOP to finish.
If you do not want to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do
want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.
005:Name ;Upper
_
005:Name ;Lower
West Coast Sales_
or
The machine is now prompting you for a name — a Location ID — so you’ll be
able to find it in the Telephone Index dialing (see page 3.8).
If you do want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, go on to step 8.
If you don’t want to enter or change this number’s Location ID, skip to step 9.
Erasing a speed-dial number
Press Program key, A, 2, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the speed-dial number
you have already entered:
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review
“Entering characters”, page 1.12) A number’s Location ID may be up to 24
characters in length.
1
Enter Speed-Dial No.
001:9-555-584-6950
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.
9
10
Note: If the speed-dial number that appears is other than 001, it means
The LCD now shows:
that 001 is empty.
005:Group No.
_
005:Group No.
1,4,12_
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial
number you want to erase. Here, we’ve selected 005:
2
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review
“Call groups,” page 3.7.)
Enter Speed-Dial No.
005:9-1-555-987-6543
If you do want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 11.
If you want to erase a different speed-dial number than the one that appears
3
If you do not want to enter or change this number’s call group, skip to step 12.
on the LCD, enter that number now.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups for this number. There are 32
possible call groups, numbered 1–32.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
11
4
005:Erase Speed-Dial
Check Enter/Cancel
Here, we’ve entered 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:
005:Group No.
6_
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number you’ve
selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP
.
Erase Speed-Dial
** Complete **
Here, we’ve entered 6, GROUP, 1, 7, GROUP, 3, 0 to assign this speed-dial num-
ber to Call Groups 6, 17 and 30:
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to
standby mode.
005:Group No.
6,17,30_
Helpful tip: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number’s
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers
you’ve stored for that speed-dial number.
To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 7, ENTER.
3.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Fax dialing via speed-dial
To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Place the document in the ADF, or on the platen glass.
1
2
Note: If the speed-dial entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly
from memory. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
If you are using the platen glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
3
4
If you specified real time transmission:
• Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
Enter Speed-Dial No.
S_
Plano Office
A4 Normal
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this
5
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD shows the
Note: If the speed-dial number doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-
ner, transmitting as it goes. (To review the Real time transmission, see page 2.3)
Location ID (or fax number) you stored:
Plano Office
S018_
Phoning via speed-dial
Press START.
To dial a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have a telephone attached
6
to your machine. To make the call:
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or real
time transmission:
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:
• Lift the handset
1
If you specified quick memory transmission:
• Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker
• Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory, then dials
the other fax machine.
• While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD shows:
2
** Tel Mode **
S_
• The LCD shows the Location ID and the document’s width and resolution settings:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial
Plano Office
A4 Normal
3
number you want to dial. As the machine dials, it shows the number on the
LCD:
Note: If the entry doesn’t have a Location ID, the number appears.
• When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document
directly from memory. (To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)
** Tel Mode **
9-555-5783_
Note: Remember that your fax machine’s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone.
If you dialed using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the
person that answers!
If you specified normal memory transmission:
• Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory, then dials the other
fax machine.
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALL to dial, press MONITOR/CALL to
hang up.
3.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
For example, the directory might show:
Call group dialing
If you frequently send the same fax message to more than one location, store the
group number into the one-touch key or speed-dial number. (If necessary, see “Using
a one-touch keys” and “Using speed-dial numbers”, in previous page.)
No. Location
00
10
20
30
2
[01]Carson Co
[02]Tex. Ofc. 1
[03]e.e.gummi
4
0
4
After you store the group number, you can send the same fax to many different loca-
tions using GROUP key.
0
S001And Sew I 2 4
S002KC Enterp
7 0
1
S003Katz Cat 12345678901234567890123456789012
Send a fax via call group
Note: The call group dialing can be used only with memory transmission.
In this list, one-touch number 01 ([01]) is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number
02 ([02]) is in group 1; one-touch number 03 ([03]) is in groups 20 and 32; speed-dial
number 001 (S001) is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial number 002 (S002) is in
groups 7, 10 and 21; and speed-dial number 003 (S003) is in all groups, 1 to 32.
Place the document in the ADF, or on the platen glass. And adjust resolution
and contrast if necessary.
1
If you are using the platen glass, enter the document size by pressing the
DOCUMENT SIZE.
2
To print a call group directory, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 9, ENTER.
Press GROUP.
3
Enter Group No.
G
Use the numeric keypad to enter the group number you want to send a fax.
4
Note: If you want to send a fax to several groups at a time, press BROADCAST
then repeat steps 2–3. Also, you can include the one-touch location,
speed-dial location and up to 30 manually dialed number. (See
“Broadcasting,” page 3.9.)
Press START.
5
Printing a call group directory
Your machine can also print a call group directory. This lists all your stored autodialer
numbers by Location ID and lists the groups to which these numbers belong.
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01–09 (the list shows 00), 10–19
(the list shows 10), 20–29 (the list shows 20) and 30–32 (the list shows 30). If you spec-
ify call group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory shows all
numbers (see right column).
3.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If a Telephone Index call fails
If a Telephone Index call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it
was.
Telephone Index dialing
Telephone Index dialing makes your autodialer even more like an electronic phone
book. Telephone Index sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their
Location IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.
If it was a fax call …
… Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial inter-
To dial using Telephone Index:
val you’ve set. It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:
For a fax call: Place the document in ADF, or on the platen glass. And adjust
resolution and contrast if necessary.
1
• It successfully reaches the other number
• It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected
(see “Changing redial settings,” page 4.5).
Press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice. The LCD shows the first listing in your fax
machine’s Telephone Index:
2
If it was a regular phone call …
… You’ll have to redial manually:
Telephone Index [A]
ABC Company
:[01]
Lifting the telephone’s handset which is connected directly to your machine.
1
2
The Telephone Index sorts entries alphabetically in the following order:
(1) by alphabet, (2) by number and (3) by symbol.
Press REDIAL/PAUSE. The LCD will show:
If the listing that appears is the one you want to dial, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, proceed to next step.
View Redial History
0:1234567890
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing
the following cursor key:
3
4
Note: To use REDIAL/PAUSE key, you should assign it to a Soft key in
advance. (See page 3.16.)
•
or
the first character of the Location ID.
or to check different listings within that character set.
to select the character set — alphabet, number or symbol — for
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers you’ve dialed.
3
•
Press
or
until the dial number you want to redial appears.
Note: The scrolling is “open-ended.” For example, when you run out of
Press START.
4
listings beginning with alphabet “A”, pressing
or
automatically
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.
When the LCD displays the name you want to dial, press START.
• If you’ve set the document in the ADF, your machine will start the fax
transmission.
• If you’ve set the document on the platen glass, enter you document size by
pressing DOCUMENT SIZE, then press START. Your machine will start the fax
transmission.
• If you make a regular phone call, speak after a person answered.
3.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Broadcasting
The fastest way to fax one document to many recipients is to broadcast it.
In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you just
add more fax numbers. You can enter up to 230 numbers:
• 30 manually-dialed numbers AND
• 200 autodialer numbers OR 1 call group with all 200 autodialer numbers
Delayed broadcasting
What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That’s the purpose of setting up
a delayed broadcast.
Note: Delayed commands are discussed on pages 2.7 and 2.8. And you may want
to read “Delayed transmission” on page 3.10 before proceeding.
You can broadcast using any function that requires a fax number to be
entered. That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broad-
cast and even broadcast to “hub” units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation. All of
these are explained in this chapter.
Follow steps 1–4 of “Broadcasting basics” (left column).
1
2
3
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time (in 24-hour
format) when you want the broadcast to occur.
Sending a broadcast fax
Here, we’ve scheduled it for 10:15 PM on the 30th.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/22:15
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a
regular fax transmission.
1
Press BROADCAST
.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
2
3
4
5
Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-
dial number, a call group or a regular number dialed from the numeric keypad.
Press START. Your machine will scan your document into the memory and
return to standby mode, while showing this on the LCD:
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma. Then enter the number as described in step 3 (pressing GROUP inserts its
own comma). You can send to up to 230 numbers for a broadcast.
4
** Reserved **
11 Jul 2002 17:17
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed broadcast you
just programmed, but it can still be used to send and receive faxes if your
broadcast document is stored in memory.
Press Start
[03],S098,G12,9-555_
Important: Do not insert a comma after the last fax number.
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCEL to erase them.
Making changes to broadcasts
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the Review com-
mands function. See “Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast,” page 2.8.
Press START. Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then
sends it to each number or call group you’ve entered.
5
3.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Delayed transmission
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed
transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed commands, each of which
you can program up to 31 days in advance.
When the date and time are entered, press ENTER to save the delayed trans-
mission. The LCD shows:
5
Enter Fax Number
_
Important: If you program all 99 delayed transmission commands, no further
memory transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is
completed. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.) However, if
all 99 delayed commands are programmed, you can always transmit
with the Real time transmission from ADF (see page 2.3).
Enter the fax number for the delayed transmission document. You can either
press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or use the numeric keypad
to enter the fax number.
6
7
Press START. Your machine returns to standby mode, while showing this on
the LCD:
Setting up a delayed transmission
Important: Your machine only remembers the day of the month that it’s supposed
to send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month
itself. So if you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PM on June 26,
don’t program the transmission sooner than 5:06 PM on May 26.
** Reserved **
11 Jul 2002 17:17
This means your fax machine is “reserved” for the delayed transmission you
just programmed.
To set up a delayed transmission:
• If you set the machine for memory transmission, it will scan the document
into memory, after which you can use the machine normally.
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
• If you set the machine for non-memory transmission (real time transmis-
sion), the machine can receive faxes but can’t transmit until your delayed
command has been performed.
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS. The LCD shows:
1.Delayed
Important: If you specified the delayed non-memory transmission (real
time transmission), do not remove the document in ADF. If the
document is removed from ADF before a delayed command com-
pletes, it cancels the delayed real time transmission.
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the current day of the month, followed by the
current time (in 24-hour format):
3
Delayed
Enter Time: 06/17:16
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you
4
want the fax to send the delayed transmission.
Note: Press to move the cursor left, or
to move it right.
Here, we’ve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/23:05
3.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Batch transmission
Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic “basket”
throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press to scroll to the left or to scroll to the right.
To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When
that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch
box to the remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document
can include one page or many pages) into your machine’s five electronic batch boxes.
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER. The LCD now shows:
6
7
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 26/14:00
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:
Option 1:
Option 2:
Once at a certain time on a certain day of the month (For exam-
ple: “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”) — Use the numeric keypad
to enter the date and time (24-hour format) the machine should
send the documents from the batch box:
Creating or modifying a batch box
Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax
machine. The steps below also let you modify existing batch boxes.
To create or modify a batch box:
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press Program key, C, 5, 0, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already
have a number entered for batch box 1, the LCD shows:
1
At a certain time each day you press the key (For example: “Do
this at 5:05 PM today.”) — Use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0
(00), and then the time when the fax should send the documents
from the batch box:
Select Batch Box
1:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
1:9-1-555-345-6789
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want
to create or modify. Here, we’ve pressed 3 and see either:
2
3:Transmit Time
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Select Batch Box
3:No Number Stored
Select Batch Box
3:9-555-2110
or
Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, press to move the cursor
left or to move it right. Then enter the correct number.
If you want to select a different batch box than the one displayed on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the batch box number now.
3
4
When the date and time are set, press ENTER.
8
9
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
The LCD now shows:
3:Fax Number
_
3:Fax Number
9-555-2110_
3:Name
_
;Upper
3:Name
;Lower
or
or
Bookkeeping_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine
should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires.
(You may want to review “Special dialing characters,” page 3.1.) The number
can be up to 40 characters in length:
The machine now asks you to name this batch box.
5
If you do not want to enter or change this batch box’s name, skip to step 11.
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review “Entering
characters”, page 1.12) A batch box’s name may be up to 24 characters in
length.
10
3:Fax Number
9-1-555-871-9052_
3.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press ENTER to save the batch box information.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
11
4
5
Press Start
Box :5 File : 1
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2–11.
To finish, press stop.
Important: Your machine gives each document in a batch box a file number,
shown as 1 above. You will need to know this file number should
you later wish to erase or print the stored document. Each
batch box holds up to 40 files (1-40).
Printing a list of batch boxes
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box’s identifier
number, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.
Press START. The machine displays “Reserved” on the top line of the LCD.
This means the document is stored in memory.
To print the list, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 5, ENTER.
Printing a list of stored batch documents
Storing a document for batch transmission
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (each document can include one
page or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the
batch transmission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they
are automatically erased from the machine’s memory.
You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine’s batch boxes. This list
provides you with the documents’ file numbers so you can erase or print them as
needed.
To print the list, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 6, ENTER.
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
• The batch box must exist on your fax machine.
Printing a document stored in a batch box
• You must know the batch box’s one-digit number (1–5).
To print a document stored in a batch box:
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:
Press Program key, D, 3, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
Batch Document
Enter Box No.
:_
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box storing the
2
3
:_
document you want to print. Here, we’ve entered 1 to indicate batch box 1.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you
want to use. Here, we’ve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.
3
1:Batch Document
Enter File No. :_
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
:5
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s file number (1–40).
4
5
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.
Press ENTER.
Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to standby mode.
3.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a document stored in a batch box
Erasing an empty batch box
To erase a document stored in a batch box on your fax machine:
Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documents stored in it, then
you first have to erase those documents. See left column.
Press Program key, D, 2, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
To erase an empty batch box:
Batch Document
Press Program key, C, 5, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Enter Box No.
:_
1
Select Batch Box
Select Batch Box
1:9-5551023
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box storing the
1:No Number Stored
2
3
document you want to erase. Here, we’ve entered 1 to indicate batch box 1.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box you want
to erase. Here, we’ve pressed 2 and see:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
2
1:Batch Document
Enter File No. :_
Select Batch Box
2:9-1-972-5559900
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document’s file number (1–40).
4
5
If you want to erase a different batch box than what appears on the LCD, enter
that batch box’s number now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your
mind before erasing the document.
Press ENTER. If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows:
1:Batch Document
2:Erase Batch Box
Check Enter/Cancel
Check
Enter/Stop
Important: To quit the operation without erasing this or any document,
Important: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps
press STOP. The machine returns to standby mode.
and briefly shows:
Press ENTER. The fax machine erases the document you’ve chosen, then
returns to standby mode.
Select Batch Box
Document Stored
6
Erase any documents stored in the batch box (see left column),
then go back to step 3.
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box you’ve
selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
Important: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP
.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Press ENTER to erase the batch box.
5
Erase Batch Box
** Complete **
To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2–5. To finish, press STOP
.
3.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Polling
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or
When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making con-
tact with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine
had placed the call.
pay for it. There are several kinds of polling:
• Regular polling — Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.
• F-Code polling — Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax
machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible
fax machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see “F-Code transmission
and polling,” pages 3.33.
Being polled
Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular
polling:
Note: For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled.
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, change it to the reception
mode except the Tel Ready.
1
Regular polling
Important: Your machine can’t be polled if it’s in Tel Ready mode.
To set up your machine for regular polling:
Insert the document.
2
3
Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.
1
2
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-
mitting to the machine doing the polling.)
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS twice and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press Program key, D, 1, 0, 1, ENTER.
Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to standby mode.
Enter Fax Number
_
4
Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-
matically erases the document from memory.
Enter the remote fax machine’s number by either pressing a one-touch key,
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.
3
To perform the regular polling now, skip to step 8.
Printing a stored polling document
4
To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.
To print a document you’ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
press Program key, D, 3, 0, 1, ENTER.
5
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
Erasing a stored polling document
To erase a document you’ve stored for regular polling from your machine’s memory,
press Program key, D, 2, 0, 1, ENTER.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time (use the 24-hour format)
when your machine should perform the delayed regular polling.
6
Press ENTER.
7
8
Press START.
3.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Limiting polling access to your fax machine
When you set the passcode, a calling fax which doesn’t “present” the proper pass-
code cannot poll from your fax.
Important: The passcode you use for polling operation is not the same as the pro-
tection passcode (see page 3.49).
Note: If you’re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 3.53–3.54), even
incoming calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone num-
bers you’ve approved.
To set your fax machine’s passcode:
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001–9999) you want to use. Write it down,
and put it in a safe place.
1
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows the current code:
2
Passcode
Passcode
:0000
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired four-digit passcode.
3
Passcode
Passcode
:5627
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4
Note: To turn off the limiting polling, change the passcode to 0000 by repeating
steps 1–4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Special features
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communication eas-
ier. We’ll cover them here.
Setting the Soft Key
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Soft Key No.
1:Sort Copy
Soft Keys
Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to
turn on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has three
Soft Keys. If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting
programmed into that key is active.
. . . or indicates another function you’ve stored into this key.
Press
or
until the Soft Key (1-3) you want to change appears. In this
2
3
example, we’ve chosen 2.
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or off:
Soft Key 1: Sort copy (see pages 2.13 and 4.7)
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
2:Fax&Copy
Note:If the optional printer controller has been installed on your
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
machine, this key will be the ONLINE key.
Soft Key 2: Fax&Copy (see page 3.20)
Soft Key 3: Bypass (see page 2.14)
Press
or
until the function appears that you want to program into the
4
5
key. In this example, we’ve chosen Cover page.
2:Cover Page
But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program
them to turn other functions on or off. These functions are:
• Energy saving (see page 4.9)
• Redial / Pause (see pages 2.2 and 2.6–2.7)
• Dialing options (see page 3.1)
• Security reception (see page 3.49)
• Confirmation report (see page 3.21)*
• Memory transmission (see page 2.3)*
• TTI transmission (see page 4.2)*
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD will display the next Soft Key.
If you do want to set this Soft Key, go back step 3.
If you do not want to set the currently displayed Soft Key but do want to set
another Soft Key, go back to step 2.
If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press STOP to finish.
Now you can use the labels included in your machine’s original packaging to label
the Soft Key function you just set.
• Cover page (see page 3.22)*
• Negative / Positive copy (see page 2.17)
• Copy / Fax changing mode (see page 1.11)
• Access to alternative telephone network (“Dial Prefix”) (see page 3.23)
• Flash — Exchange PBX to PSTN by entering the “flash” signal.
* When you change the setting by using the Soft Key, it will be available only for
the next transmission. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns
to its default setting. If you want to change the default setting, see “Changing the
default settings” on page 4.1–4.10.
3.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Document storage:
• Regular polling documents (page 3.14)
• F-Code polling documents (page 3.29)
Macro keys
If you perform the same operation repeatedly, you can automate the operation using
a macro. A macro is a series of the several steps that you group together as a single
command to accomplish the operation automatically.
Communications functions:
• Delayed transmission (explained on pages 3.10)
• Broadcasting (page 3.9)
• Regular polling (pages 3.14–3.15)
• Batch transmission (pages 3.11–3.13)
• F-Code transmission (page 3.32)
• F-Code polling (page 3.33)
A macro key faithfully records up to 60 steps that you performed to teach the macro.
You can “teach” the Macro keys to carry out any of the following jobs, but you cannot
teach the operation regarding the machine settings.
Note: One Macro key can hold only one job. It cannot combine two or more jobs.
Copy:
• All copy settings
Printouts:
• Machine settings list (page 4.10)
• Fax settings list (page 4.10)
• Copy settings list (page 4.10)
• Activity journal (page 3.21)
Programming the Macro key
Press MACRO PROGRAM, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Macro Key
M1:No Number Stored
• Delayed commands list (page 2.8)
• Delayed commands documents (page 2.8)
• One-touch list (page 3.3)
Press the Macro key (M1 or M2) you want to program or change. In this exam-
2
ple, we’ve chosen M2.
Select Macro Key
M2:No Number Stored
• Speed-dial list (page 3.5)
• Programmable one-touch numbers list (page 3.47)
• Call group directory (page 3.7)
• Blocked numbers list (page 3.54)
• Sample cover page (page 3.22)
• Department time list (page 3.56)
• List of F-Code boxes (page 3.28)
• List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.28)
• Batch transmission documents (page 3.12)
• Batch box list (page 3.12)
Press ENTER. If you chose the key already programmed, proceed to step 4.
3
4
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
The LCD shows:
Overwrite?
Check Enter/Cancel
If you want to overwrite the operation already programmed, press ENTER.
If you want to overwrite only the job’s name, press CANCEL and go to step 9.
If you do not want to overwrite the key you have choice, press STOP.
The LCD of stand-by mode appears, which means the machine is ready to reg-
ister the steps into the Macro key.
• List of stored batch documents (page 3.12)
• F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents (pages 3.29, 3.30)
• Macros list (page 3.19)
• Stored polling documents (page 3.14)
• Security receive documents (page 3.50)
5
Fax Ready
11 Jul 2002 13:30
Note: It keeps beeping during the job registration in order to make notice of
the registration mode.
3.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Copying with the Macro key
To copy using a Macro key:
Press the keys exactly as you operate the job you want to program into the
Macro key.
6
Note: You can program up to 60 steps. When it comes over 60 steps, your fax
machine asks if you register the operations you have entered. If you
want to register them, press ENTER. If not, press STOP.
Insert the document.
1
2
3
Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the copy command.
Note: If you want to cancel the operations you have set, press
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.
MACRO PROGRAM, STOP and then go back to step 1.
Example 1: To program some operations for copy: Press COPY/FAX to change
the copy mode, and set number of the copies, paper size, contrast, resolution,
reduction/enlargement rate and sort setting as you want.
Printing lists using the Macro key
To print a list using a Macro key:
Note: See “Making copies” (pages 2.12–2.17) for detail operations.
Press the Macro key in which is programmed for the printing lists.
1
Example 2: To program the operations for printing the one-touch numbers
list: Press Program key, E, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTER in the Macro key.
2
Storing fax documents with the Macro key
To store a fax document for either polling or F-Code polling using a Macro key:
If you programmed ENTER or START into the operation, proceed to step 8.
Otherwise, press MACRO PROGRAM and skip to step 9.
7
8
Insert the document.
If you want to start immediately after pressing the Macro key when you use
1
2
it, press ENTER. If not, press CANCEL.
Press the Macro key which is programmed for the storing operation you
want to use.
Note: If you want to confirm the settings or operations in the Macro key
before you start it, press CANCEL here.
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTER in the Macro key.
3
Include Start/Enter?
Check Enter/Cancel
Fax dialing with the Macro key
To dial a fax call using a Macro key:
The LCD now shows:
9
Insert the document.
M2:Name
_
;Upper
M2:
Delayed_
Name ;Upper
1
2
or
Press the Macro key in which you’ve stored the fax communication com-
mand.
The machine now asks you to name this job.
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.
If you do not want to enter or change this job’s name, skip to step 11.
3
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review “Entering
characters”, page 1.12) A job’s name may be up to 130 characters in length.
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:
10
11
Press ENTER to save the setting.
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,
the LCD shows the number:
3.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
until the mode you want appears. The possible settings are:
Erasing a Macro key
Press
or
2
3
Press MACRO PROGRAM twice, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Macro Speed
:Norm
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Select Macro Key
M1:Activity journal
Macro Speed
:Slow
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press the Macro key (M1 or M2) you want to erase. Here, we’ve chosen M2.
2
Select Macro Key
M2:Batch box list
Macro Speed
:Fast
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Erase Macro
Check Enter/Cancel
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the Macro key you’ve
selected, press CANCEL. The machine will return to step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the job.
4
Erase Macro
** Complete **
To erase another Macro key, repeat steps 2–4. Or press STOP to return to standby
mode.
Printing a list of your Macro keys
Your fax machine can print a list of the Macro keys.
The list includes:
(1) each key’s Macro key number
(2) the name of the job stored in the Macro key
To print a list of Macro keys, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 7, ENTER.
Setting the speed for Macros
You can adjust the speed of one step in the Macro key.
Press MACRO PROGRAM three times, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Macro Speed
:Norm
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
3.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Fax & Copy
The LCD changes copy mode and asks the number of copies you want to make.
4
5
6
With the Fax & Copy feature turned on, your machine asks if you want to make a
copy of a document each time it transmits that document from memory.
Fax & Copy
1
A4 Auto 100%
Note: The Fax & Copy function cannot be used for real time transmission, and
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want for each page
in the document. Choose from 01 to 99 copies.
when the copy protection feature is set to on.
Note: Quick Memory transmission (see page 2.3) and the Fax & Copy function
cannot be used at the same time. If both are turned on, Quick Memory will
not work.
Note: If you want to quit without transmitting and copying the document,
press STOP. The machine returns to standby mode.
Press START to begin the transmission and copying process.
Note: The Fax & Copy feature will use the same resolution you set for the trans-
mission for the copy’s scanning resolution.
Helpful tip: If you do not wish to make a copy, press CANCEL in step 4. The LCD will
show:
Setting the Fax & Copy function
Canceled Copying
Start/Stop
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 6, ENTER.
1
Fax & Copy
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
To cancel the making copy, press START. The machine start transmis-
sion process without copying the document.
If you press STOP, the machine return to step 4.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Fax & Copy
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Setting the activity journal
Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine
keeps an activity journal which records its 100 most recent fax transactions. The
activity journal lists the following information for each transaction:
• Assigned number, starting each day at 001
• Remote location called
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4
Press STOP to return to standby mode.
Note: You can turn it on or off by simply pressing FAX
&
COPY.
• Resolution mode
Using the Fax & Copy function
• Starting date and time
• Duration, in minutes and seconds
• Length, in number of pages
• Department code (see page 3.55)
• Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM communi-
cation. If preceded by a pound (#), this signifies communication was via the
highspeed V.34 modem.
Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.
1
2
Note: With this function, you cannot select normal and halftone resolution.
Enter the fax number. Either press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number,
call group number or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.
If you entered the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, go on to step 3.
• Any special operations — For example, a polling reception will appear as
Press START.
“Polling”
3
3.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transac-
tions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:
Setting the reports: TCRs
Your fax machine can print a transmit confirmation report (TCR) after sending every
fax to any Group 3 fax machine. The TCR lists the following information for each com-
munication:
Press Program key, C, 1, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Journal AutoPrt.:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
• Date and time of the TCR’s printout
• Remote location called
• Resolution mode
• Starting date and time
• Duration, in minutes and seconds
• Length, in number of pages
• Result of the call
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Journal AutoPrt.:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
• Any special operations — For example, a polling reception will appear as
“Polling”
Printing an activity journal manually
• Sample of the document — An image of the first page of the document
If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location which was called, the error
code and error message (see pages 5.9–5.11).
To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be
completed, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 4, ENTER.
Setting the printing order of the activity journal
Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example,
if your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.
If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can
change the printing order of the activity journal. To change the printing order:
To set the printing of TCR:
Press Program key, C, 1, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Report AutoPrint:Off
ꢀ ꢁ
/ /Enter
Press Program key, C, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Journal Line Up :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Report AutoPrint:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
If you want the activity journal to print in the order of assigned number,
choose “On”.
Otherwise, the machine will list every fax transaction of the same command
and same location.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Helpful tip: If you will frequently turn this feature on and off, you can assign it to
a Soft key (see page 3.16) to turn on or off by simply pressing that key.
Here, we’ve chosen On.
Journal Line Up :On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Entering the cover page message
Cover page
Press Program key, C, 2, 0, 2, ENTER.
Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing
fax. This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax
number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The
information appears in a box similar to this:
1
2
Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. Enter the
message the same way you entered your fax name during Initial Setting. The
message can be up to 40 characters in length.
Important: As in Initial setting, enter letters and other non-numeric char-
Fax Message From:
acters by using the one-touch keys.
11 Nov 2003 14:00
When the message appears as you want it, press ENTER to save it.
3
Printing the cover page
Name:
And Sew It Goes Co.
972-555-2009
Fax Number:
To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your
fax machine. Press Program key, E, 1, 1, 1, ENTER.
[We appreciate your business. Thank you!]
Audible alarm
Whenever your fax machine receives a document from another fax machine, your
machine will sound the alarm tone alerting the person for whom the document is
intended.
Turning the cover page on
Press Program key, C, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Important: The alarm tone is sounding until either the person presses STOP or
Cover Page
:Off
another document is received.
ꢂ/ꢃ/Enter
Note: Your machine does not sound the alarm during:
• Polling
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you
2
transmit, press
or
until “On” appears on the LCD.
• F-Code polling reception
• Turning off this feature
Cover Page
:On
ꢂ/ꢃ/Enter
To toggle this audible alarm feature on or off:
Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover page, press
or
until “Off”
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 4, ENTER.
appears on the LCD and press STOP.
1
Audible Alarm :Off
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
/ /Enter
ꢀ ꢁ
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example
as “We appreciate your business. Thank you!”) is blank. To enter that message, see
“Entering the cover page message,” next page.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Sending faxes with Dial prefix feature
Using alternative telephone network service providers
Your fax machine is fitted with a Soft Key on the control panel to allow easy access
to other telephone networks such as Cable Telecom, Sprint or AT&T.
Note: If you use the MONITOR/CALL key to dial, you cannot use DIALING OPTIONS
key. You must assign Dial Prefix to one Soft Key in advance and use it.
For this feature to work, either Dial Prefix or Dialing Options should be assigned to
To dial using the numeric keypad
Soft Keys. (Refer to page 3.1 and 3.16.)
Set the documents.
The following information describes how to program the access number for the
Cable Telecom. For other networks you will have to program the appropriate access
number in place of the Cable Telecom access number. You can enter numbers up to
40 digits.
1
2
Press the Soft Key assigned DIAL PREFIX once or DIALING OPTIONS three times,
then the LCD will show a "!" symbol to indicate the access to the alternative
telephone network.
Press Start
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 5, ENTER.
1
Dial Prefix No
_
Dial a cost centre code (2 or 3 digits) if you selected this option when ordering
3
Cable Telecom service. Enter the fax number using the numeric keypad.
Enter the Telephone network access number on the numeric keypad. In this
2
Press START.
example, we've entered 131 (Mercury PIN code service). If you entered 132
4
(Cable Telecom), skip to step 5.
Notes:
Note: If you wish to access the Telephone network from a PBX, enter the PSTN
access code followed by a dialling pause (the dialling pause is only
necessary on pulse dial PBX's) before you enter the 131 or 132.
i.e., 9-/131-/PIN, or 9-/132 if a pause is required.
• You must enter the full National Code telephone number when dialling tele-
phone numbers via any network.
• You can not enter the Soft Key followed by the one-touch or speed-dial key (see
below for more information).
Dial Prefix No
131_
To dial using the one-touch or speed-dial keys
In order to send faxes using the one-touch or speed-dial keys, you must instruct
your fax machine to access the alternative telephone network when you store the
fax number into your autodialler.
Press REDIAL/PAUSE on the control panel to enter a "-/" in the LCD. This
3
instructs your fax machine to wait for a secondary dial tone before dialling
the PIN number.
To enter the access number into your autodialler:
Before entering a fax number, press the Soft Key assigned DIAL PREFIX. And then,
enter the fax number.
Dial Prefix No
-/
131 _
Now enter your PIN number (10 digits).
4
5
To send faxes using the autodialler:
Set the document and press the one-touch key or enter the speed-dial number, as
usual.
Dial Prefix No
-/
131 1234567890_
Note: If you wish to erase your PIN number, press CANCEL to erase all pro-
grammed numbers before proceeding to step 5.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3.23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Page counter
The power of Multi-Access
You can confirm the number of total printed pages on the LCD.
• Total — The total pages your machine has printed.
• Copy — The total pages printed for copying.
Your fax machine’s Multi-Access feature sharply reduces the time you might spend
waiting for the machine to finish its work. Multi-Access is a more powerful version
of what already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with nor-
mal dual access allows you to do two things at once, Multi-Access allows you to do
four operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy, (2)
transmitting from memory and (3) scanning documents for a different memory
transmission, you can still (4) program the machine.
• Fax — The total pages printed for received fax messages.
• Printer — The total pages printed for list printing and PC printing.
Note: PC printing is available only when your machine has the
optional printer controller kit installed.
Note: If your machine is Konica 7013:
The MFX-1300 cannot printing and scanning at same time.
If you try to scanning the document during the machine is printing, the
following message will be shown:
Press COPY COUNT. The LCD shows the total pages your machine has printed
1
up to the present:
Total
:000026813
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop
OK: Will Scan Soon
Pressing , the LCD will change as follows:
• If the machine is printing the lists, the machine will scan the document
after the printing is finished.
• If the machine is printing the stored document or received document,
the machine will pause the current printing job and it will give priority
to scanning the document. After scanning is finished, the machine
resumes the printing job.
2
Copy
:000014702
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop
Fax
:000006412
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop
Printer :000005679
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop
When you finished confirming, press STOP.
The machine will return to standby mode.
3
3.24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
• Relay box — Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The
F-Code Boxes
machine that relays the document is called a “hub”. Your fax machine can either
send to a hub or it can be a hub.
F-Code: an introduction
4 elements of an F-Code box
Each F-Code box has the following four elements:
(1) F-Code box number (01-50)
The ITU-T, the United Nations agency that standardises international telecommuni-
cations, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing and
password-based communication. One name for this standard is F-Code, and that’s
what we’ll call it in these instructions and on your machine’s display.
(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)
(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the * and #
How sub-addressing works
characters only)
To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company
receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to
the company’s main mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.
That’s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax
exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It’s as if the
sending fax is saying, “Deliver this to room 48,” and the receiving fax does just that.
Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone
sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes
— whichever box the sender chooses.
(4) .D. Code (4 digits)
I
You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your
machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that
information.
To create or modify an F-Code box:
Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps. As you decide on a
1
sub-address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to:
(1) write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any
Sending F-Code securely
passwords or
place.
I.D. codes you enter, (3) keep these printed records in a safe
For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address,
which lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when com-
municating with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.
Press Program key, C, 4, 0, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already
2
3
have a name entered for F-Code box 01, the LCD shows:
Guidelines for using F-Code
(1) To use ITU-T sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine
(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:NY Branch Office
or
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
box you want to create or modify. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see either:
(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document
can include one or more pages)
Select F-Code Box
03:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
or
Creating or modifying an F-Code box
If want to select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,
use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit F-Code box number now.
Choosing the F-Code box type
Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it — as a
bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.
• Bulletin box — Stores documents that people in remote locations retrieve by
polling the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get
a printout of your latest prices that you’ve stored in a bulletin box.
4
5
Press ENTER. What you do next depends on whether you’re creating or
modifying the F-Code box:
If creating — skip to step 7.
If modifying — the LCD asks you to enter the proper .D. code. The LCD shows:
I
A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents, and it holds its
contents indefinitely (as long as the unit has AC power).
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
• Security box — Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.
3.25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit
I
.
D. code (not the ITU-T sub-
Next, the machine asks for your F-Code box’s password. This is the password
for ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax transactions. The LCD shows:
6
7
12
13
address and not the ITU-T password) and then press ENTER.
Note: If you enter an invalid D. code, the fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
The machine is now asking you to name this F-Code box. The LCD shows:
I.
03:Password
_
03:Password
123456789*#_
or
Note: You don’t need to have a password for the F-Code box. However, using
03:Box Name;Upper
_
03:Box Name;Upper
Konica America_
a password will make your F-Code communication much more secure.
or
If you do not want to enter or change this box’s password, skip to step 14.
If you do not want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, skip to step 9.
If you do want to enter or change this F-Code box’s name, go on to step 8.
Use the numeric keypad to enter this box’s ITU-T-compatible password. This
password can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combination of
numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical characters).
Here, we’ve entered 135*7#9.
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review “Entering
characters”, page 1.12) An F-Code box’s name can be up to 16 characters in
length.
8
9
03:Password
135*7#9_
Press ENTER to save the box’s name and continue. The LCD shows:
03:Sub-Address No.
_
03:Sub-Address No.
123456_
Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you’re modi-
fying an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type, you
first must erase the old box, then create a new one.
or
The fax machine now asks for this F-Code box’s sub-address. This is the
numerical identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote
F-Code compatible fax.
Press ENTER to save the password. The LCD now shows:
14
15
Box Type :Bulletin
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
If you do not want to change an existing sub-address, skip to step 11.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub-address to identify this F-Code box.
The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any
combination of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-
numeric characters).
The fax machine is asking which box type you want to assign to this box —
bulletin, security or relay.
10
11
Press
or
until the type of box you want appears.
Press ENTER.
03:Sub-Address No.
654321_
If you chose Bulletin, go on to step 16.
If you chose Security, skip to step 17.
If you chose Relay, skip to step 20.
Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address
as the one you enter here.
If you chose Bulletin:
The bulletin box has four additional settings:
Press ENTER to save the sub-address.
16
Note: If you entered a sub-address already being used by another F-Code
• Reception protection (“Rx Protect” on the LCD)
• Automatic printing of received documents (“Auto Print”)
• Overwriting documents (“Overwrite Doc.”)
box, the machine beeps and briefly displays:
03:Sub-Address No.
Sub-Address In Use
• Erasure of transmitted documents (“Erase Tx Doc.”)
The machine now returns you to step 10. Please enter a different
number for your F-Code box’s sub-address.
3.26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Rx Protect — Reception protection tells this box if it’s okay to receive
Erase Tx Doc — Erasure of transmitted documents tells your machine if it
documents from remote locations. Callers can then poll these documents.
should erase a document from the box after a caller retrieves (polls) the
document.
Rx Protect
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Erase Tx Doc. :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
On: Do not open this box to receive documents from callers.
Off: Open this box to receive documents from callers.
On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If
you choose “On”, this box can be polled only once per document.
Off: Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it’s polled.
As long as your machine holds AC power and you do not erase the docu-
ment from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
Auto Print — Automatic printing of received documents tells the fax machine
if it should print a document automatically upon receiving it into this box.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx pro-
Press ENTER to save the setting. Then skip to step 24.
tect) setting is set to off (see above).
If you chose Security:
Auto Print
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
The machine asks how long you want to keep a document stored in your
machine’s F-Code box. The LCD shows:
17
On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.
Off: Print the document manually, when you want to print it.
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time (00-31):00
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how many
days (00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in this
F-Code box. Here, we’ve entered 09, for nine days:
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
18
Overwrite Doc — Overwriting documents tells your machine if it should
overwrite (erase) existing documents when it receives a new one.
F-Code Doc Hold Time
Hold Time (00-31):09
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is
set to off (see Rx Protect above).
Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up
to 30 documents) as long as 31 days, after which it automatically
erases the documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you
may want to override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documents
indefinitely. If so, enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete
documents manually. (You may want to contact your authorised
Konica dealer regarding optional memory expansion.)
Overwrite Doc. :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase
any documents currently stored in it.
Off: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will not
erase the documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents (each document can include one or more pages) in each box.
Press ENTER to save the settings. Skip to step 24.
19
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
If you chose Relay:
Then press ENTER to save the setting and go on to the next one.
The machine asks for the fax number for the remote unit.
The LCD shows:
20
Enter Relay Number
_
3.27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Enter the fax number using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code for this F-Code box.
I
21
26
27
group number. You cannot use the numeric keypad to enter these numbers.
Important: After completing this step, you must know this code to print
To add each fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to insert a
comma, then enter the number. You can specify up to 200 numbers for a
remote unit.
documents sent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.
Press ENTER to save the F-Code box information.
To create or modify another F-Code box, repeat steps 3-27.
To finish, press STOP.
Enter Relay Number
S001,G12_
Printing a list of F-Code boxes
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
22
The list of F-Code boxes includes:
Select TTI :Sender
(1) Each box’s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
(3) Sub-address
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
The machine asks for the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are
relayed to other callers.
• Sender — Relay the document with sender unit’s TTI (don’t send your TTI).
• Both — Relay the document with both the sender unit’s TTI and your TTI.
• Yours — Relay the document with your TTI instead of the sender unit’s.
(4) Password
(5) Box type
(6) Each box’s settings
To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 3, ENTER.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Press ENTER to save the settings. The LCD shows:
23
Auto Print
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes
The list of documents stored in your machine’s F-Code boxes includes:
(1) Each box’s identifier number
(2) Box name (if any)
On: Print the document automatically when it’s received.
Off: The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.
(3) Box type
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored
Then press ENTER to save the settings and go on to step 24.
To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 4,
ENTER.
The machine asks for your F-Code box’s four-digit security .D. code. This is
I
24
25
the .D. code for the box’s security, which you use to (1) print a document any
I
remote F-Code-compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before
you can make any changes to this F-Code box.
03:Set F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:0000
If you do not want to change the
Decide on a four-digit D. code (0001-9999) for this F-Code box.
Write it down, and put it in a safe place.
Important: Do not use 0000 as an D. code.
I.D. code, skip to step 27.
I.
I.
3.28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Using a bulletin box
Press ENTER.
7
If you’ve entered an incorrect
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
Storing a document
Your fax machine can store up to 30 documents in each bulletin box.
and returns to standby mode.
If you’ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
• The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
Overwrite Doc. :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
• You must know the bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and four-digit
If you choose:
I
.D. code. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box,” pages 3.25–3.28, if
necessary.)
On: Your bulletin box erases the currently stored document when a new
document is stored in it
Off: Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new
document, up to 30 documents in each box.
To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.
1
2
Press Program key, D, 1, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
8
9
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica Machinery
Press ENTER to save the setting. Your machine starts scanning the document
into the selected bulletin box:
or
F-Code Doc. File: 1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box where you want to store the document.
Here, we’ve entered 0, 3:
3
A4
Mem 99%
Important: The file number (shown above as 1) tells you how many docu-
ments are in this bulletin box. Your machine numbers files 1-30.
You need to know the file’s number to erase or print it.
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
If you want to use a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
4
5
Printing a document stored in a bulletin box
You can print a document stored in your machine’s F-Code bulletin boxes without
erasing the document from memory.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
To print a stored document:
Press Program key, D, 3, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code.
I
1
6
Here, we’ve entered 2345:
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica Machinery
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We’ve entered 03:
2
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
3.29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
4
To erase a stored document:
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
Press Program key, D, 2, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
1
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit .D. code.
Here we’ve entered 2345:
I
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to erase. We’ve entered 03:
2
Press ENTER.
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
5
6
If you’ve entered an incorrect
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
If you’ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
03:F-Code Document
File No.
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
:_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to print. Here we’ve entered 3.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
displays the following before returning to step 2:
03:F-Code Document
Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
File No.
:3_
Note: If you want to print all documents stored in the bulletin box, simply
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit .D. code.
I
4
5
enter 0 (zero).
Here we’ve entered 2345:
Press ENTER.
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
7
Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby
mode.
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
Press ENTER.
displays the following before returning to standby mode:
If you’ve entered an incorrect
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
and aborts this operation.
If you’ve entered the correct
03:Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
I.D. code, the display shows:
03:F-Code Document
File No.
:_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the file number (1-30) of the document you
want to erase. Here we’ve entered 3.
6
03:F-Code Document
File No.
:3_
Note: If you want to erase all documents stored in the bulletin box, enter 0
(zero).
3.30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
7
8
3
03:F-Code Document
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:****
Check
Enter/Stop
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any document in the bulletin box,
Note: If the F-Code security box is not storing any documents, the machine
press STOP. The machine will return to standby mode.
briefly displays the following before returning to step 2:
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly
03:Select F-Code Box
No Document Stored
displays the following and then returns to standby mode:
03:F-Code Document
No Document Stored
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box’s four-digit .D. code.
Here we’ve entered 2345:
I
4
5
Press ENTER to erase the document(s) and to return to standby mode.
03:F-Code Document
Enter I.D. Code:2345
F-Code Document
** Complete **
Press ENTER.
• If you’ve entered the correct
ments in the F-Code security box and then erases them.
• If you’ve entered an incorrect D. code, your fax machine aborts the opera-
tion and returns to standby mode.
I
.D. code, your fax machine prints all docu-
Using a security box
I.
Printing a document you receive
When your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to an F-Code
security box, your machine prints a message to let you know. The message lists: (1)
the F-Code box number that received the document, (2) the Box name, (3) the
remote machine’s TTI (if any), and (4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.
You then have a certain number of days (see step 17 and 18 on page 3.27) in which
to print out the document before your machine automatically erases it.
Using a relay box
Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU-T sub-addressing to one of its F-
Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you’ve set up on your
relay box. (See “Creating or Modifying an F-Code box”, pages 3.25–3.28.)
If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine
will print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise,
your machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See “If you chose
Relay,” pages 3.27–3.28 for more details on this setting.
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:
• You must know the F-Code security box’s two-digit number.
• You must know the F-Code security box’s four-digit
I.D. code.
Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub
machine’s F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See “F-Code trans-
mission” on pages 3.32–3.34 for more detail.
The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original doc-
ument to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.
To print a received message:
Press Program key, D, 3, 0, 2, ENTER The LCD shows:
1
2
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code
bulletin box that stores the document you want to print. We’ve entered 03:
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
3.31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing an empty F-Code box
An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in
these steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all docu-
ments in that box before erasing it.)
Press ENTER.
6
7
If you’ve entered an incorrect
I
.
D. code, your fax machine rejects the attempt
and returns to standby mode.
If you’ve entered the correct
I.D. code, the display shows:
03:Erase F-Code Box
Check Enter/Cancel
To erase an empty F-Code box:
Press Program key, C, 4, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you’ve selected,
Select F-Code Box
01:No Number Stored
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica
press CANCEL. The fax will return to step 2.
or
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press STOP.
The machine returns to standby mode.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
the F-Code box you want to erase. Here, we’ve entered 0, 3 and see:
2
Press ENTER to erase the F-Code box.
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
Erase F-Code Box
** Complete **
If you want to erase a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the
LCD, enter the box number now.
To erase another F-Code box, repeat steps 2-7.
3
4
To finish, press STOP.
Press ENTER. If the F-Code box is empty, the LCD shows:
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:****
F-Code transmission and polling
With F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast
initiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manu-
Important: If you select an F-Code box which is not empty, the machine
facturer.
You can do this two ways:
• Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 3.40–3.43)
• Entering the ITU-T sub-address and password directly, which is what we’ll
describe here.
beeps and, before returning to step 3, briefly displays:
Select F-Code Box
Box In Use
Print any documents received in the F-Code box, then repeat
this procedure from the beginning to erase the box.
Otherwise, select another F-Code box.
Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:
• The remote fax machine must support ITU-T sub-addressing
• The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU-T sub-address created
on it
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit .D. code.
I
5
Here, we’ve entered 2345:
03:Erase F-Code Box
Enter I.D. Code:2345
• You must know the ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for the
remote machine’s mailbox
F-Code transmission
Insert the document.
1
2
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.
3.32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you want to toggle between real time transmission and memory transmis-
Press START.
3
4
13
sion, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.
If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing.
If you chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicat-
ing that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS three times and then press ENTER.
Enter Sub-Address
_
F-Code polling
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address in the remote
5
machine. In this example, we’ve entered 123456.
Press FAX to switch the machine to Fax mode.
1
2
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS four times and then press ENTER.
Enter Sub-Address
_
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
enter the correct number.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
6
In this example, we’ve entered 123456.
Enter Password
_
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase the character, then
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve
entered 654321.
enter the correct number.
7
8
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
Enter Password
654321_
Enter Password
_
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 6.
Enter Fax Number
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password. In this example, we’ve
entered 654321.
5
Enter Password
654321_
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do not press START.
9
What you do now depends on when you want the transmission to begin.
• To have it begin now, skip to step 13.
• To delay it, go on to step 11.
10
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
6
Enter Fax Number
_
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
11
12
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do not press START.
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
7
What you do now depends upon when you want the polling to begin.
• To have it begin now, skip to step 11.
• To delay it, go on to step 9.
8
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the transmission
should begin, then press ENTER.
3.33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programmable one-touch keys
Press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
9
Delayed
Enter Time: 15/17:05
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow sev-
eral steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine’s
one-touch keys (P1 and P2) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the polling should
10
11
begin, then press ENTER.
You can “teach” the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:
Press START.
Communications functions:
• Delayed transmission (explained on pages 3.10)
• Broadcasting (page 3.9)
If in step 8 you chose an immediate polling, your fax machine begins dialing. If you
chose a delayed command, the machine shows “Reserved” on the LCD, indicating that
it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.
• Regular polling (pages 3.14–3.15)
• Batch transmission (pages 3.11–3.13)
• F-Code transmission (page 3.32)
• F-Code polling (page 3.33)
To “teach” these keys, you tell the machine four simple things:
• How — The key you’re programming
• Who — The number(s) the machine should dial
• What — The operation it should perform
• When — The date(s) and time(s) when you want it to perform the operation
Printouts:
• Machine settings list (page 4.10)
• Fax settings list (page 4.10)
• Copy settings list (page 4.10)
• Activity journal (page 3.21)
• Delayed commands list (page 2.8)
• One-touch list (page 3.3)
• Speed-dial list (page 3.5)
• Programmable one-touch numbers list (page 3.47)
• Call group directory (page 3.7)
• Blocked numbers list (page 3.54)
• Sample cover page (page 3.22)
• Department time list (page 3.56)
• List of F-Code boxes (page 3.28)
• List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.28)
• Batch box list (page 3.12)
3.34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
• List of stored batch documents (page 3.12)
• Macros list (page 3.19)
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
4
Document storage:
• Regular polling documents (page 3.14)
• F-Code polling documents (page 3.28)
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press
until “Communication” appears.
Programming a delayed transmission
5
6
7
Type :Communication
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
or
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Important: Do not press ENTER.
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Now, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
8
9
2
3
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Delayed
Enter Time: 11/20:30
Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-
mand for this key was a for a delayed operation, and you want to keep
this key programmed for a delayed operation, use these instructions
to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely
different operation for batch transmission, then you must first erase
the stored command before programming the new one.
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Option 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
3.35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Option 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
17
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Report
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press
until the mode you want appears.
18
19
Press ENTER, ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for
this programmable one-touch number.
10
11
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
Option
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Cover Page
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to step
Press
until the mode you want appears.
24.
20
21
If you do want to make additional settings, press
and ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
Fax & Copy
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Resolution :------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: When the memory transmission is set to off in step 15, this LCD will
Press
until the mode you want appears.
not appear and go to step 24.
12
13
Note: For any of the following settings, choose “-----” if you do not want to
Press
until the mode you want appears.
22
23
24
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Press ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Contrast
:-------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
14
15
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
Memory Tx
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
16
3.36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a broadcast / group
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission.
But instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for
the transmission.
Press
until “Communication” appears.
5
6
7
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
1
or
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 230 fax numbers — you can use any
combination of call groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and manually-
dialed numbers.
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Important: Do not press ENTER.
Press BROADCAST to enter a comma between each number or call group.
Important: Do not insert a comma after the last number.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
To enter a speed-dial number, press SPEED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the number’s
three-digit identifier.
To enter a call group, press GROUP and the group’s identifier number.
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
G5,G7,[01],S006,9-55
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 11.
If you want to delay the broadcast, press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER.
8
9
Note: If you’re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-
mand for this key was a for a broadcast/group transmission, and you
want to keep this key programmed for a broadcast/group transmis-
sion, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to
assign this key to a completely different operation for batch transmis-
sion, then you must first erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Option 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what
appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Option 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
18
mable one-touch number.
Cover Page
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press
until the mode you want appears.
19
20
Press ENTER, ENTER.
10
11
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable
one-touch number.
Fax & Copy
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Option
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
21
22
23
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Then skip to step
Press ENTER.
23.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
and ENTER.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
12
Resolution :------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
13
14
Note: For any of the following settings, choose “-----” if you do not want to
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Contrast
:-------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
15
16
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Report
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
17
3.38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming regular polling
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
6
7
To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
or
9-5558743_
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550696_
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Important: Do not press ENTER.
Next, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED FUNC-
TIONS twice and then press ENTER.
8
9
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,
press ENTER and skip to step 12.
If you want to delay the polling, press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
10
Option 1:
Option 2:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a polling transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time the fax should perform the command:
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER, ENTER.
11
12
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Press
until “Communication” appears.
5
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
3.39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until “Communication” appears.
Programming an F-Code transmission
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
5
6
7
• You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you’re
transmitting — for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manu-
facturers may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.
• You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password for each box to
which you want to transmit.
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
or
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Important: Do not press ENTER.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Enter Sub-Address
_
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which
you want to send the document. Here, we’ve entered 123456:
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code transmis-
sion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
transmission, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want
to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a delayed
transmission, for example), then you first must erase the stored com-
mand before programming the new one.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
Enter Password
_
Note: If there isn’t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 13.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.
Here, we’ve entered 654321:
11
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Enter Password
654321_
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
When finished, press ENTER.
3.40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step 15.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
12
13
18
ble one-touch number.
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER.
Contrast
:-------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Option 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Press
until the mode you want appears.
19
20
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the memory transmission on or off
when using this programmable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Memory Tx
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Option 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax should perform the command:
Press
until the mode you want appears.
21
22
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you for the type of confirmation report you want to
set for this programmable one-touch number.
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Report
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER, ENTER.
14
15
Press
until the mode you want appears.
23
24
The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable
one-touch number.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to send a cover page for this program-
mable one-touch number.
Option
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Cover Page
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Skip to step 29.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
Press
until the mode you want appears.
25
26
and ENTER.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
off for this programmable one-touch number.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
16
17
Fax & Copy
:---
Resolution :------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: When the memory transmission is set to off in step 20, this LCD will
Press
until the mode you want appears.
not appear and go to step 29.
Note: For any of the following settings, choose “-----” if you do not want to
Press
until the mode you want appears.
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
27
28
29
Press ENTER.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
3.41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press until “Communication” appears.
Programming F-Code polling
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
5
6
7
• The document which you’re polling must exist in the remote fax’s F-Code box (ITU-T
standard sub-addressing/password box).
• You must know the remote fax’s ITU-T sub-address and password (if any) for each
box you want to poll.
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5558743_
To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:
or
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can
be up to 40 characters in length:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.
9-5550629_
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond
those 20, press
to scroll to the left or
to scroll to the right.
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Important: Do not press ENTER.
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:
8
9
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Enter Sub-Address
_
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the ITU-T sub-address for the box to which
you want to send the document. Here, we’ve entered 123456:
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Enter Sub-Address
123456_
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code polling oper-
ation and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code
polling operation, use these instructions to make changes. But if you
want to assign this key to a completely different operation (for a
delayed transmission, for example), then you first must erase the
stored command before programming the new one.
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
10
Enter Password
_
Note: If there isn’t a password for this box, press ENTER, then skip to step 14.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU-T password for the box.
Here, we’ve entered 654321:
11
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Enter Password
654321_
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
When finished, press ENTER.
3.42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a batch transmission
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the
key, press ENTER and skip to step15.
12
13
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCED FUNCTIONS, ENTER.
• The batch box you’re using must exist on your fax machine.
• You must know the batch box’s identifier number (1–5).
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:
Option 1:
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of
the month. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date
and time when the fax should perform the command:
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Delayed
Enter Time: 30/17:05
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
Option 2:
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the
key. (For example, “Do this at 5:05 PM today.”)
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 and
then the time when the fax should perform the command:
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Delayed
Enter Time: 00/17:05
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Press ENTER, ENTER.
14
15
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a batch transmission
and you want to keep this key programmed for a batch transmission,
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for
example), then you first must erase the stored command before pro-
gramming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Press
until “Communication” appears.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or
5
13
off for this programmable one-touch number.
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Fax & Copy
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER, ADVANCED FUNCTIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD
shows:
6
7
Press
until the mode you want appears.
14
15
16
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
Press ENTER.
:_
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you
want to assign to this one-touch key. Here, we’ve entered 5:
Batch Tx
Enter Box No.
:5
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCEL to erase it.
Then re-enter the correct identifier.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want to make additional settings for this
8
9
programmable one-touch number.
Option
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
If you do not want to make additional settings, press ENTER. Skip to step 16.
If you do want to make additional settings, press
and ENTER.
The LCD asks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-
touch number.
Resolution :-----
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
10
11
Note: For any of the following settings, choose “-----” if you do not want to
specify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a contrast mode for each programma-
ble one-touch number.
Contrast
:-------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the mode you want appears.
12
3.44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming printouts
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which list you want to program into the program-
6
mable one-touch:
To program a programmable one-touch key to print a list:
P2:Machine Settings
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
until the list you want appears.
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
7
8
9
Press ENTER.
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for printing a list of the
machine settings, you will see:
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
Select Program No.
P1:Machine Settings
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Note: If your previous command for this key was for printing a list and you
want to keep this key programmed for printing a list, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Type :Communication
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
Press
until “List Print” appears.
5
Type :List Print
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
3.45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Programming a document storage operation
If you want to program a programmable one-touch key to store an F-Code polling
document, two things must be true:
• The F-Code bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.
• You must know the F-Code bulletin box’s two-digit number (01-50) and name.
Press
until “Store Document” appears.
5
6
Type :Store Document
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which storing menu you want to program into the
programmable one-touch:
To program your programmable one-touch to store a regular polling document or
F-Code polling document:
P2:Polling Document
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the first empty pro-
grammable one-touch number available:
1
Press
until the mode you want appears.
7
8
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
Press ENTER.
If you select the “Polling Document” operation, skip to step 14.
If you select the “F-Code Document” operation, go on to step 9.
Note: If P2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a
number for P1. You can see what you programmed into P1 by press-
ing , if you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling
document, you will see:
The LCD asks which F-Code bulletin box you want to use.
9
Select F-Code Box
01:Konica
Select Program No.
P1:Polling Document
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier number (01-50) of
10
the F-Code box in which you want to store the document. Here, we’ve entered
Press
enter.
to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to
0, 3:
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, see page 3.48.
Select F-Code Box
03:Konica America
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we’ve selected P2.
2
Select Program No.
P2:No Number Stored
To select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD, enter
that box number now.
11
12
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the box to overwrite (erase) any docu-
ments it is currently storing whenever it stores a new document.
Note: If your previous command for this key was to store a document and
you want to keep this key programmed to store a document, use these
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a
completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before
programming the new one.
Overwrite Doc. :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
On: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it will over-
write documents stored in it.
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one
that appears on the LCD, press that key now.
3
4
Off: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it won’t erase
(overwrite) any documents stored in it. Your machine can store up to 30
documents in each box (each document can include one or more pages).
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which operation you want to program into the pro-
grammable one-touch:
Press
until the mode you want appears.
Type :Communication
13
Then press ENTER to save the setting.
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.
3.46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch
The LCD asks if you want to program additional settings for this one-touch.
14
15
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:
Option
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Set your document in the ADF or on the platen glass.
1
2
3
Make any necessary adjustments as usual.
If you do not want to program additional settings, press ENTER. Go to step 22.
If you do want to program additional settings, press
to step 15.
and ENTER, then go on
If you are using the platen glass, set the document size by pressing DOCU-
MENT SIZE before you press the programmable one-touch key.
The LCD asks which resolution you want each time you use this programma-
ble one-touch number.
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you’ve stored the fax commu-
nication command.
4
Resolution :------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.
Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that
Press
until the mode you want appears.
16
17
operation. See page 3.35 for a list of each operation and where to find it.
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing “---” tells the machine to
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD shows:
use its default setting for this programmable one-touch key.
** Reserved **
11 Jul 2002 17:17
Press ENTER. The LCD asks which contrast mode you want each time you use
this programmable one-touch number.
Contrast
:-------
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it,
the LCD shows the number:
9-1-972-555-4335
A4 Normal
Press
until the mode you want appears.
18
19
Press ENTER. The LCD asks if you want the Fax & Copy feature on or off each
time you use this programmable one-touch number.
Fax & Copy
:---
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys
You fax machine can print a list of the commands you’ve stored in your programma-
ble one-touch keys.
Press
until the mode you want appears.
20
21
22
Press ENTER.
The list includes:
(1) each key’s one-touch number
(2) the fax/telephone number
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
(3) when the command should start
(4) which command you’ve selected
(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you’ve stored in
the key
(6) the individual settings for each key
To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 8,
ENTER.
3.47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Erasing a programmable one-touch key
Press Program key, A, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the first programmable
one-touch number that has been programmed:
1
Select Program No.
P1:Delayed
Note: If P2 appears, it means P1 is empty.
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, we’ve
selected P2:
2
Select Program No.
P2:Polling
To erase a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears
on the LCD, press that key now.
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
4
P2:Erase P One-Touch
Check Enter/Cancel
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-
touch key you’ve selected, press CANCEL. The fax will return to
step 2.
Press ENTER to erase the number.
5
Erase P One-Touch
** Complete **
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to
return to standby mode.
3.48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Security features
Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documents
private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-
rised use of your machine.
These security features include:
(1) Security reception, (2) PIN mask, (3) Block junk fax, and (4) Department codes.
Security reception
Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not
print them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example,
you could use this if you’re concerned about workers reading documents intended
for your eyes only.
Important: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
tion as described on left column. You must also know the passcode.
The passcode
Note: In the following instructions, your machine’s LCD shortens the word
Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to
Transmission to Tx and the word Receive to Rx.
use the security features listed below:
• Security reception
• PIN mask
• Department code protection
To set your machine’s passcode:
Activating security reception
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Security Rx
Enter Passcode :****
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001–9999) you want to use. Write it down,
and put it in a safe place.
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the protection passcode.
Here, we’ve entered 6296:
2
Important: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
Security Rx
2
Enter Passcode :6296
Protect Passcode
Old Passcode :****
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
3
If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric keypad to enter 0000.
If you are changing an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.
Security Rx
:Off
3
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER.
4
5
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
4
5
Here, we’ve chosen “On.”
Enter the new four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered 6296:
Security Rx
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Protect Passcode
New Passcode :6296
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the machine’s current clock setting:
Press ENTER to save the passcode.
6
Security Rx
Enter Time:
Note: Any time you want to turn off the passcode, change the passcode back to
15:42
0000 by repeating steps 2–6 and entering 0000 in step 5.
3.49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception
When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine’s
memory and the MEMORY RECEIVE light comes on. But the incoming fax message is
not printed.
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your
machine to normal reception until the next time):
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),
6
7
skip to step 8.
Otherwise, go on to step 7.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use a 24-hour format) when secu-
rity reception should begin every day. “Type over” the numbers displayed.
Here, we’ve entered 17:35:
Press Program key, D, 3, 0, 4, ENTER
Security Rx
Enter Time:
1
If you using SECURITY RECEPTION key, press it instead of this operation.
17:35
In which way, the LCD shows:
To change a digit, press
the correct digit.
to move to the left, or
to move right. Then enter
Security Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode :****
Press ENTER to save the setting.
8
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here we’ve entered 6296:
2
Helpful tip: After setting for activating the security reception, you can turn it on
and off by pressing SECURITY RECEPTION. It is not effected the time
setting you entered at step 7. It begins the security reception immedi-
ately.
Security Rx Doc.
Enter Passcode :6296
Press ENTER.
3
To turn the security reception on by pressing SECURITY RECEPTION:
• If you’ve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-
ments in its memory and then erase them. Then it will turn security
reception off until the next time you’ve scheduled security reception or
SECURITY RECEPTION key is pressed.
Press SECURITY RECEPTION.
2
Enter Passcode :****
• If you’ve entered an incorrect passcode, your fax machine will refuse to
print, and security reception remains on.
Enter the protection passcode and then press ENTER.
3
The LCD briefly shows following and the LED of SECURITY RECEPTION will light
and the security reception begins immediately.
** Sec. Rx Active **
Note: To turn the security reception off, see “Printing from security
reception/Turning off security reception,” next column.
3.50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
Masking the PIN
Press
or
4
5
“Mode1.”
To prevent unauthorised long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require
you to enter a personal identification number (PIN) whenever you dial long distance.
PIN Mode
:Mode1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Your fax’s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. With the PIN
mask activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in
a journal, error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR. The PIN may be up
to eight characters in length. It also can include the * or # symbols, and it can be
entered from the numeric keypad.
Press ENTER.
Autodialing while using the PIN mask
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:
Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your
• Off — Turns off the PIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any dis-
machine’s autodialer. If you need to review, see pages 3.1–3.8.
play or printout which shows the number you dial.
If you chose “Mode 1” — the PIN goes in
• Mode 1 — Each remote fax unit has a departmental PIN access code.
• Mode 2 — Each fax user has a departmental PIN access code.
In Mode 1, before autodialing a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to
the stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Here’s how:
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you
must store the remote unit’s PIN access code within that number. However, if
you select Mode 2, this isn’t necessary. (See “Autodialing while using the PIN
mask,” next column for further details.)
Begin by creating or changing an entry in the autodialer. See pages 3.1–3.8 if
1
necessary. While you’re setting this up, the machine asks you to enter the PIN.
The LCD shows:
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see pages 3.11–3.13), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit
within the appropriate batch box.
Set PIN Number
Enter Passcode :****
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ll use our
2
Activating the PIN mask
sample passcode again.
Important: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-
Set PIN Number
Enter Passcode :6296
tion as described on page 3.49. You must also know the passcode.
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Press ENTER. In our example, we’re setting speed-dial number 001:
3
PIN Mode
Enter Passcode :****
001:PIN Number
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, we’ve entered
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired PIN, up to eight characters in
6296.
4
length.
PIN Mode
Enter Passcode :6296
001:PIN Number
1057_
Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the machine’s security feature rejects
Press ENTER to save the PIN.
the attempt and returns to standby mode.
5
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
Press ENTER.
3
indicates “Invalid Number” on the LCD and then returns to step 4.
PIN Mode
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Now you may autodial the number as usual.
3.51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Important: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include
the PIN. This also applies to autodialer numbers used with batch
transmission (see page 3.11) or programmable one-touch keys (see
pages 3.34–3.48).
If you’ve specified Mode 2 — the machine guides you
Enter the phone number as usual.
1
Press Start
19725550911_
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission,
you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropri-
ate batch box.
Press START. The LCD shows:
2
Enter PIN Number
_
If you chose “Mode 2” — as you autodial, load the code
In this mode, you don’t have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting. Instead, you
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
3
enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:
Enter PIN Number
123456_
Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialer. Here, we’ve
pushed one-touch key A. The machine now asks for the PIN:
1
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
Enter PIN Number
_
4
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.
2
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use
both your machine’s autodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you
need to review, see pages 3.1–3.8 for more on the autodialer and/or page 3.11
for more on batch transmission.
Enter PIN Number
1057_
Press START. Your machine dials the number.
3
If you’ve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission
(see page 3.11), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit
within the appropriate batch box.
Important: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission must include
the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an autodialer
number, review the Mode 1 instructions under “Autodialing while
using the PIN mask,” page 3.51.)
Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN within its
batch box. Here’s how:
Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask
If you’ve specified Mode 1 — use “star” power
Follow the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages 3.11–3.12).
Enter the phone number, then press the * (“star”) key and enter the PIN.
1
1
The LCD asks for the fax number (here, we’re working with batch box 1):
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of
“123456”, enter 19725550911*123456:
1:Fax Number
_
Press Start
19725550911*123456_
Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-
ber, to which the batch transmission should go.
2
Press START. The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the
desired phone number.
2
Important: If you’re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the
fax number, followed by the * (“star”) key and then the PIN.
3.52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Setting Block Junk Fax
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,
Your fax machine’s Block Junk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-
rised incoming faxes (“junk fax”). But before you block junk fax, first understand
how this feature works, to determine if it’s right for you. There are four possible set-
tings for Block Junk Fax:
indicates “No PIN Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.
Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages
3.11–3.12).
• Off — The feature isn’t activated.
• Mode1 — Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone
number in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote fax’s sub-
scriber ID (the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesn’t find a match, your
machine disconnects the call.
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.
• Mode2 — This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits
match any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine
can hold up to 50 blocked numbers.
• Mode3 — This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialer and also rejects num-
bers that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your
autodialer for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by putting
it in the blocked numbers list.
But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:
• Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —
With Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these
machines.
• Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with extra codes,
such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes.
To set Block Junk Fax:
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current set-
ting:
1
Block Junk Fax:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen Mode2.
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
What you do next depends on what you selected in step 1:
• If you selected Off or Mode1, press STOP to return to standby mode.
• If you selected either Mode2 or Mode3, go on to step 4.
3.53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list
Depending on if you have already entered at least one number into the
4
5
blocked numbers list, the LCD shows one of the following:
To clear a number from the list:
Press Program key, B, 2, 1, 0, ENTER.
If your Block Junk Fax setting is either Mode2 or Mode3, skip to step 3.
Enter Fax Number
01:_
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
1
or
Block Junk Fax:Off
If you want to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
or
until you see the number you want to modify.
… or …
Press
or
until you see your preference, Mode2 or Mode3.
If you want to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers
list, press
2
3
or
until you find an empty position in the list.
Block Junk Fax:Mode2
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Then press ENTER to enter or modify the blocked number.
Note: To clear a number from the list, see “Clearing a number from the
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:
blocked numbers list,” right column.
Select BlockJunk No.
01:555-2971
Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight characters of a fax number you
want to block. For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a
Subscriber ID of 972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, DIALING OPTIONS, 3, 0,
3, 8:
6
Press
or
until you see the number you want to clear.
4
5
Press CANCEL to clear the number.
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4–5.
Otherwise, go on to step 6.
Enter Fax Number
01:555-3038_
To change a specific digit, press
cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct
number.
to move left or
to move right until the
Press STOP to return your machine to standby mode.
6
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the next “slot” in the blocked
numbers list.
If you do not want to enter or change a number for this slot, go on to step 8.
If you do want to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5–7.
Printing a list of the blocked numbers
Forgot which number is stored in the blocked number list? Just print a list of the
blocked numbers.
7
8
To print a list of the blocked numbers, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 0, ENTER.
Press STOP. Your machine will return to standby mode.
3.54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Clearing a department code
Using department codes
You can keep track of how your machine is used through its department code feature.
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to
enter the department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity
Journal then keeps track of fax transactions by department.
Press Program key, C, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Select Department No
001:1555
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your office’s fax users
and tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes.
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
Note: Please note that using this setting may block access to the fax machine.
Press
or
until you see the code you want to clear. Here, we’ve selected
2
3
Entering a department code
“3111”.
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.
Select Department No
005:3111
To enter a department code:
Press Program key, C, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. Depending upon whether you’ve
already entered a department code, the LCD shows:
1
Press CANCEL. The LCD shows:
3111:Erase Dpt. Code
Check Enter/Cancel
Enter Dept. Code
001:_
Select Department No
001:1555
or
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the department code you’ve
Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 3.56), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
selected, press CANCEL. The machine will return to step 2.
Press ENTER. The code you selected will be cleared.
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2–3.
If you don’t want to clear another department code, press STOP to return to
standby mode.
4
If you have not entered any codes in your fax, skip to step 4.
Otherwise, go on to step 3.
2
3
To enter a new code in a department code list that’s already been started,
press ENTER. The fax will skip to the next empty position in the list.
Turning the department code setting on and off
Note: If you want to modify an existing entry in the department code, you
first clear a department code you want to modify and then enter a
new code (see “Clearing a department code,” right column).
Press Program key, C, 3, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Dept. Setting :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000–9999.
Here, we’ve entered 1555:
4
5
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next page), the fax
beeps briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn
off the protection first, then repeat this step.
Enter Dept. Code
001:1555
Important: To turn the department code setting on, at least one depart-
To change one digit, press
to move left or
to move right until the cursor
ment code must be existed in your machine.
is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.
Press
or
until you see the setting you want.
2
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
To enter another department code, repeat steps 4–5.
To stop entering department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.
Dept. Setting :On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER.
3.55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
Turning department code protection on and off
Press START
.
4
5
Important: This feature will work only if you’ve activated the passcode protection
Enter Dept. Code
_
(see page 3.49).
Press Program key, C, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate four-digit department code.
In this example, we’ve entered 3111:
Set Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: ****
Enter Dept. Code
3111_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode:
2
Set Dept. Protect
Enter Passcode: 6296
Press START again.
6
Printing the department time list
To change one digit, press
to move left or
to move right until the cursor
is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.
To print the list, press Program key, E, 1, 1, 2, ENTER.
Press ENTER.
3
4
5
Note: If department code operation is protected (see left column), the fax beeps
briefly and then returns to standby mode. You will have to turn off the pro-
tection first, then repeat the above.
Dept. Protect :Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
The department time list includes the following information for each department
code:
• Time period covered by the department time list
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
Dept. Protect :On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
• Each department code
• Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:MM:SS) — Counts
the communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the
fax exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Sending a fax using a department code
For this operation to work, two things must be true:
• The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.
• You must know the department code.
• Total printed pages — Counts the pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the
maximum number of pages, it counts the total pages from 0 (zero).
Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see “Clearing
the current department time list”, below.
Insert the document.
Clearing the department time list
1
2
3
To clear the current total counts of each department code:
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.
Press Program key, C, 3, 0, 4, ENTER, ENTER.
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad.
The total communication time and total printed pages for each department code are
cleared. The department code will not be erased.
If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key, skip to step 5.
Otherwise, go on to step 4.
3.56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced features
This page is intentionally blank.
3.57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
This chapter describes
how to change the settings of your
machine.
Settings for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Settings for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Settings for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Settings for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Settings for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for transmission
By following the steps above, you’ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending
Scan settings
documents, you can “override” these default scan settings for that transmission.
Default setting: Primary resolution: Normal, Primary contrast: Normal
To override the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:
• Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.
• Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
Two different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory
settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing
any of these settings:
Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to its default settings.
• Primary resolution mode — Sets the resolution for your documents. Choose
either normal, fine, superfine (“S Fine” on the LCD) or grayscale mode (“Gray”).
• Primary contrast mode — Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents
Setting ECM
Default setting: On
to be when they arrive at their destinations.
Note: The primary settings you choose effect your fax activity only.
To set these modes:
“Line noise,” or static on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data
from one fax machine to another.
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:
1
That’s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode
(ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending
machine automatically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can’t
verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.
Resolution :Normal
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
2
Note: ECM gives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad
phone line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse
the line is, the slower the transmission. That’s why the machine lets you
turn ECM on or off as needed.
fine resolution.
Resolution :Fine
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If you’ve activated ECM and then transmit to
a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax
transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:
3
4
Contrast
:Normal
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows the current ECM set-
ting:
1
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
light contrast.
ECM Mode
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Contrast
:Light
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
5
ECM Mode
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Memory transmission
Default setting: On
TTI transmission
Default setting: On
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text
at the very top of the page. This text lists a name, called the Transmit Terminal
Identifier (TTI), and a fax number. You can set the machine to not send the TTI.
Note: When the machine’s memory is full, it can transmit only through the docu-
ment feeder (real time transmission).
Note: When you use the platen glass, the machine always uses memory transmis-
sion even if you set the memory transmission to off.
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
TTI Tx
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
To change the default setting of memory transmission:
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 6, ENTER.
1
Press
or
until the setting you want appears. In this example, we’ve
Memory Tx
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
2
3
chosen Off.
TTI Tx
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Memory Tx
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Quick Memory transmission
Default setting: On
Important: Your fax machine’s memory transmission feature must be turned on
to use Quick Memory transmission (see above).
To change the default setting of Quick Memory transmission:
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Quick Tx
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Here, we’ve chosen Off.
Quick Tx
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for reception
Half-page reception
Print settings
Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-
page, “memo-sized” messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to
combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception
only combines half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission.
It won’t combine two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:
• Print reduction rate
• Reduction margin
• Paper save function
You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on next page. Following is a
explanation for each:
To adjust the print settings
Default setting: Rx reduction rate: Auto, Reduction margin: 24 mm,
Half-page reception: Off
Print reduction rate
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documents to a
size that fits the paper in your machine. (This setting doesn’t affect copies you may
make with your machine.)
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print
1
reduction rate:
Rx Reduc.Rate :Auto
Below are the options for the print reduction rate for fax reception:
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Setting
Auto
What it does
Press
or
until the reduction setting you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen 100%.
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a
minimum of 50%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of
your selected paper size. If it can’t, print the image at 100% size
on two or more pages.
Rx Reduc.Rate :100%
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current reduction margin:
Does not reduce documents. (Due to the sender’s TTI, this may print
3
4
100%
two pages when receiving a one-page fax document.)
Margin
(00-85mm):24
Reduction margin
Your machine’s reduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). We’ll define
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If
reduction margin by explaining how it’s used:
necessary, press
38mm.
or
to move the cursor. In this example, we’ve chosen
When a fax message enters your machine’s electronic brain, the machine measures
the message’s length and compares it to (a) the length of your selected paper (not
include the print margins) plus (b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of
the incoming message is shorter than (a) and (b) put together, your machine prints
the message on just one sheet.
Margin
(00-85mm):38
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for
half-page reception:
5
If it’s longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 24 mm will
print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and
then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.
Half Page Recpt.:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
4.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Press
or
until the setting you want appears. In this example, we’ve cho-
6
7
sen On.
Half Page Recpt.:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Setting the number of rings
Default setting: 2 times
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.
Choose from 1 to 9 rings.
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
# Of Rings
#
(1-9):2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of rings you want, from 1 to 9.
Here, we’ve chosen 4 rings.
2
# Of Rings
#
(1-9):4
Note: If you enter the number except 1-9, the machine will beep briefly to
warn you that it can’t accept that setting.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for dialing
Changing the dialing pause length
Default setting: 2 seconds
Changing redial settings
Default setting: Number of redial: 2 times, Redial interval: 3 minutes
It’s up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits
between redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval).
To program the redial settings:
The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long
as ten seconds if necessary. To change the pause length:
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
Press Program key, B, 2, 0, 4, ENTER.
1
Dialing Pause
# Of Redials
Time
(02-10):02
#
(2-5):2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want for the dialing pause.
Here, we’ve chosen nine seconds.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of redials you want. Choose
2
from 2 to 5 redials. In this example, we’ve entered 3.
Dialing Pause
# Of Redials
Time
(02-10):09
#
(2-5):3
Note: The length setting requires two digits. Always enter a leading zero for
Press ENTER to save the setting.
lengths less than 10 seconds.
3
4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD now shows:
3
Redial Interval
Interval
(3-5):3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want between redial
5
6
attempts. Choose from 3 to 5 minutes. In this example, we’ve chosen 4.
Redial Interval
Interval
(3-5):4
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for copying
By following the steps above, you’ve set your defaults for scanning. Before copying
Copy scan settings
documents, you can “override” these default scan settings for that copying.
Default setting: Primary document type: Text, Primary contrast: Normal
To override the default document type and contrast settings before copying a docu-
ment:
• Press DOCUMENT to change the document type.
• Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.
Two different settings tell your machine how to scan documents. The initial factory
settings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing
any of these settings:
• Primary document type — Sets the document type for your documents.
Once your document is copied, your machine returns to its default settings.
Choose either Text, Text&Photo, or Photo.
• Primary contrast — Sets how light or dark you want copied documents to be.
Note: These primary settings you choose effect your copy activity only.
To set these modes:
Adjusting the copy print settings
Default setting: Margin: 24 mm
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select a resolution:
Your machine’s print margin for copying is measured in millimeters (mm). We’ll
define print margin by explaining how it’s used:
When an original document is scanned, the machine measures the document’s
length and compares it to (a) the length of your selected paper (not include the
print margins) plus (b) the print margin you set. If the length of the document is
longer than (a) and (b) put together, your machine prints the document on more
than one sheet.
1
Doc. Type:Text
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
PHOTO.
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
2
Doc. Type:Photo
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: A print margin setting of 24 mm will print most documents as single pages.
Try this combination first and then, only if you have problems with it, select
different settings.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks you to select a contrast setting:
3
4
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the current print mar-
gin for copying:
1
Contrast
:Normal
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Margin
Press
or
until the mode you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
(00-85mm):24
light contrast.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the print margin you want. If necessary,
2
Contrast
:Light
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
press
or
to move the cursor. In this example, we’ve chosen 20mm.
Margin
Press ENTER to save the setting.
(00-85mm):20
5
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
4.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Changing the copy auto reset time
Default setting: 3 minutes
Setting sort copy
Default setting: On
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after a certain period of
time. You can change this time from 1 to 10 minutes.
You can set the sort setting to off for default setting by following procedure.
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 6, ENTER.
1
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 3, ENTER.
1
Sort Copy
:On
Auto Reset Time
(01-10):03
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time you want for the copy auto reset.
In this example, we’ve chosen Off.
2
Here, we’ve chosen ten minutes.
Sort Copy
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Auto Reset Time
(01-10):10
Press ENTER to save the setting.
3
Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.
Helpful Tip: You can override the setting of sort copy by pressing SORT before you
Press ENTER to save the setting.
press START to make copies.
3
Setting copy auto
Default setting: Auto is set for Recording paper size
Setting Negative/Positive
Default setting: Off
The machine automatically selects the recording paper size according to the docu-
ment size and enlargement/reduction rate. You can change it to select the document
size or enlargement/reduction rate automatically, instead of the recording paper
size.
If you frequently use the Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas), you
can set it to on for default setting by following procedure.
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 7, ENTER.
1
Nega/Posi
:Off
Press Program key, B, 3, 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD asks you to select the item
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
you want to set to Auto:
Copy Auto:Paper Size
Press
or
until the setting you want appears.
2
3
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
Nega/Posi
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the item you want appears. In this example, we’ve chosen
2
3
Document size.
Copy Auto:Doc. Size
Press ENTER to save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode
with following display:
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1
Press ENTER to save the setting.
A4
Auto
100%
4.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Settings for operation
Setting the silent mode
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
6
7
Default setting: Off
If you want to turn off the alarm, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will beep.
Silent mode allows you to mute the ringer, the alarm and the key tones.
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the key tones on
or off:
• Ringer — If you turn the ringer off in silent mode, a ring alerts you when you
receive fax or voice call.
• Alarm — If you disable the alarm in silent mode, the sound your machine
makes when an error occurs and the beep your machine makes after sending or
receiving a fax or making a copy cannot be heard.
KeyBuzzer Silent:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
• Key tone — If you mute the key tone, your machine will not make a sound when
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
8
9
you press the buttons on the control panel.
If you want to turn off the tones, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will beep when the keys are pressed.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows your fax’s current set-
ting:
1
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Silent Mode
:Off
If you turned off the alarm or the key tones in the steps above, your machine
gives you the option of setting the volume for the alarm and key tones. If this
option appears, skip to step 10.
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
If you didn’t turn any of these off, your fax machine returns to standby mode.
2
3
Note: If you chose On, the silent mode of Ringer, Alarm or Key tone can be
set to be available. If you chose Off, the machine will ring and beep as
usual.
The LCD shows your fax’s current setting:
10
11
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid
If you chose Off, skip to step 10.
/ /Enter
ꢀ ꢁ
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the ringer to be
on or off:
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Below are the possible settings:
Ringer Silent :Off
Alarm&Key Volume:Max
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
= Loudest setting.
= Medium setting.
= Low setting.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
4
5
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid
If you want to turn off the ringer, select “On” and the machine will be quiet.
Otherwise, the machine will ring.
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD now asks if you want the alarm turned
on or off:
Alarm&Key Volume:Min
/ /Enter
ꢀ ꢁ
Alarm Silent
:Off
Press ENTER to save the setting.
12
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
4.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Setting Sleep mode (Energy saving mode)
Default setting: On
Setting the paper source
Default setting: 1st cassette: Fax/Copy, Bypass Tray: Fax/Copy
Your machine is initially set to be in the Sleep mode automatically when 5 minutes
has passed after you pressed any key last.
If you want to set the Sleep mode to Off, you can set it here.
You can choose one of following for each paper source:
“Fax”:
Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for fax-
ing and list (or report) printing.
Note: If you want to change the time, see page 1.19.
“Copy”:
Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for copy-
ing only.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 5, ENTER.
1
“Fax/Copy”: Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for fax-
ing, list (or report) printing and copying.
Sleep Mode
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
“Not Used”: Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for PC
printing.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
Note: PC printing is available only when your machine has the
2
3
optional printer controller kit.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows:
1
Cassette1 :Fax/Copy
Helpful Tip: By pressing ENERGY SAVING, you can switch the machine to Sleep
mode immediately, regardless of the on/off setting or time setting on
page 1.19. To use the ENERGY SAVING key, you should assign it to a
Soft key in advance. (See page 3.16.)
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Note: All LED lamps on the control panel will not be off, even when the machine is
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows:
in the sleep mode.
Bypass Tray:Fax/Copy
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Primary mode
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
4
5
Default setting: None
You can set the primary standby mode in this operation. After finishing any jobs,
your machine will return to the mode you set here immediately.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Press Program key, B, 1, 0, 7, ENTER.
1
Setting 2-bin tray (Option)
Default setting: Copy exit: Lower tray, Fax exit: Upper tray, List exit: Upper tray,
Primary Mode :None
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
PC-Fax exit: Upper tray
You will set where to exit the printed paper in this operation.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.
Note: This operation will appear only when your machine has the optional 2-bin
tray unit.
Press Program key, B, 1, 1, 0, ENTER.
1
2-Bin Tray
:Off
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
4.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
Printing your settings
After you’ve programmed settings into your machine, print a settings list. We
recommend this, particularly if you’re sharing the machine with other users, who
might change the settings.
Press
or
until the mode you want appears.
2
In this example, we’ve chosen On.
2-Bin Tray
:On
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
With this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without
having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo
someone else’s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your
preferred settings.
If you chose On, proceed to step 3.
If you chose Off, skip to step 7.
Press ENTER. The LCD asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for copy exit.
3
4
Settings are divided into three; Machine Settings, Fax Settings and Copy Settings.
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
In this example, we’ve chosen Upper.
To print the Machine settings list, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 1, ENTER.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
Copy exit
:Upper
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Machine Settings
** Printing **
Press ENTER to save the setting.
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for fax reception.
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
To print the Fax settings list, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 2, ENTER.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
In this example, we’ve chosen Lower.
Fax exit
:Lower
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Fax Settings
** Printing **
Press ENTER to save the setting.
To print the Copy settings list, press Program key, E, 1, 0, 3, ENTER.
5
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for list printing.
The LCD will show the following as the list prints:
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
In this example, we’ve chosen Lower.
Copy Settings
** Printing **
List exit
:Lower
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any
settings you don’t recognise or understand.
If your machine has the optional RS-232C interface kit, proceed to step 6.
Otherwise, skip to step 7.
The LCD now asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for PC printing.
Printing a program list
6
7
Press
or
until the tray you want appears.
Your machine can also print a program list. This lists the functions available on your
fax machine and the keystrokes needed to complete them. (See also “Function Table,”
pages 1.14 – 1.17.)
In this example, we’ve chosen Lower.
PC-FAX exit :Lower
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter
To print a program list, press Program key, *, 8.
Press ENTER to save the setting.
4.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the default settings
This page is intentionally blank.
4.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Tips on caring for your machine
What to do if problems occur
Glossary
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Clearing paper jams
To remove the document:
If an original document jams
If an original document jams in the ADF while scanning the document into the
Open the scanner cover.
1
1
memory for faxing or copying, the LCD will show:
Document Jam
ContStor Enter/Cancl
If you do wish to continue the operation, press ENTER and proceed to step 2.
To abort the operation, press CANCEL. This will erase from memory all pages
stored during this operation, and the machine will return to standby mode.
Important: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the
machine will erase from memory all pages stored during this
operation and the machine will return to the standby mode.
Lift the original document from the
2
machine.
Note: If the document jammed in the following case, the following message
will appear and the machine will abort the operation anyway; instead,
you’ll have to perform the job again from scratch.
Note: If you cannot remove the origi-
nal document, open the inner
cover as shown at right, then
remove the document.
• The first page of the document jammed
• During the real time transmission or quick memory transmission
• During non-sorting ADF job
Open&Close ScanCover
Reset Document
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down
securely.
Also, the “Repeat transmission. Error on scan at page xx” message
will be printed out if the document jammed during transmission.
3
Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn, do not re-send
The LCD will show which page (i. e., which page number) is jammed. To con-
2
it.
tinue scanning from the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at
the end of step 1, above), press START after clearing the jam.
p 2. Reset Document
Press Start Key
Note: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the
machine will begin to send or copy the document(s) it has.
If you wish to cancel this operation, press STOP. The machine will delete all
pages from memory and then return to its standby mode.
5.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
If a printout jams inside your machine
Remove the jammed paper.
4
To clear a printout jammed inside your machine:
Important: The fuser unit becomes
very hot.
Important: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the
Do not touch the fuser
unit when you are remov-
ing a paper jam.
machine.
Open the top cover.
Note: Avoid getting “unfixed” toner on
1
your hands and clothes.
Open the side cover.
Pulling up the jam release lever to
remove the jammed paper.
Open the printer cover.
2
Reset the toner and drum cartridge.
5
Remove the toner and drum cartridge.
3
Important: Shield the drum cartridge
from light, especially
strong light. Later, if you
have to remove the car-
tridge from the fax,
immediately wrap it in a
thick cloth to protect it
from light.
Gently close the printer
cover, pressing firmly on
the both sides of the
printer cover until you
hear it click.
6
7
Gently close the top cover,
pressing firmly on the both
sides of the top cover until
you hear it click.
5.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Print quality problems
If your machine’s printouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below
that matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the
suggested solutions. If they don’t work, contact your authorised Konica dealer.
Printouts are too dark
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Pages are blank
• The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be
installed correctly.
Install each cartridge correctly.
• The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
be very low.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Printouts have a blurred background
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Pages are black
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
• Your fax machine’s printer may be due for a service check.
Call your dealer.
Printouts are of uneven density
• The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the
toner cartridge.
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
• The drum cartridge may be defective.
Printouts are too light
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
• The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may
be very low.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside.
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.
• The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.
ABCDE
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
5.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Printouts have irregularities
Printouts have toner smudges
• The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner
cartridge.
• The paper you’re using may have absorbed moisture, per-
haps due either to high humidity or water having been
spilled on the paper supply. Toner will not adhere well to
wet paper.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ACDE
ABCDE
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to
redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace
the cartridge.
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.
• The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the
problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as
indicated.
• If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-
port roller may be dirty.
Printouts have white and/or black lines
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automat-
ically. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Konica dealer.
• The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage.
If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-
tridges as indicated.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
• The LED print head may be dirty.
Using the cleaning paper, gently clean the LED print head.
Printouts have white spots
• The charger may be dirty.
• The charger may be dirty.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Konica dealer.
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorised
Konica dealer.
5.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Troubleshooting
Occasionally, your fax machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving
documents. When it does, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem
with LCD messages and printed check messages and error reports, explained in the
following pages.
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Change to Fax Mode
You tried to to store the document for polling (or
for F-Code Box) when the machine is in the
Copy mode. You can store the fax document only
when the machine is in the Fax mode.
Check Memory Tx
You tried to turn the Fax&Copy feature ON, but
the memory transmission setting is OFF. To use
the Fax&Copy feature, the memory transmis-
sion setting must be set to ON.
Alarm
Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone — a series of short beeps — if either of
these two problems occur:
Set the Memory Tx to ON, then try again.
• Trouble transmitting or receiving
• The machine is out of paper
Check Paper Size
Open&Close Top Cover
The different sized paper which is not same
sized paper you told your machine is loaded.
Set correct sized paper or change the paper size
setting (see pages 1.8–1.10).
LCD error messages
What you see on the LCD
Close Scanner Cover
Close Top Cover
Close 1st Side Cover
Close 2nd Side Cover
The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has
not been closed securely. Close it properly.
What it means/What to do
All Commands In Use
Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible
delayed commands (automatic redialing counts
as one) stored in memory and cannot accept
another. Wait until your fax has completed one of
the delayed commands or delete an existing
command by using COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM.
Close 1st Cassette
Close 2nd Cassette
The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open
or has not been closed securely. Close it properly.
Communication Error
A communication error disrupted the reception
or transmission. If you were transmitting, press
STOP to clear the error message and then re-try
the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try
to contact the other person and have him/her re-
try the transmission. (The problem may be
Already Stored
You tried to enter the same fax (or phone) num-
ber which is already entered in your fax
machine.
Enter a different fax (or phone) number.
Box In Use
You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains
at least one document.
Erase the document(s), then try again.
entirely with his/her machine, phone line, etc.)
Copy Off
You tried to change your fax machine to the copy
mode, but the unit’s copy protection feature
(page 2.17) is on, preventing such use. Turn off
copy protection.
Call For Service
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable.
Make repeated copies to help evaporate any
internal moisture. If that doesn’t resolve the
problem, call your authorised Konica dealer.
Department Code Full
You tried to enter department code more than
100. Your machine can store up to 100 depart-
ment codes.
5.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Document Full
You tried to enter an document into an F-Code
box, but the machine has reached its capacity
(30 documents). Delete documents stored in
F-Code boxes until the machine will let you pro-
ceed.
In Relay Box
You tried to store a document for polling in an
F-Code box which is set to be a relay box.
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin
box, then try again.
In Secure Box
You tried to store a document for polling in an
F-Code box which is set to be a security box.
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin
box, then try again.
Document Jam
ContStor Enter/Cancl
An original document jam while you are using
the ADF for either faxing or copying. See page 5.1
for instructions on clearing the jam.
Document Stored
Enter No. (0-32)
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at
least one document. Erase the document(s), then
try again.
In Use in P OneTouch
You tried to erase the F-Code box or Batch box,
which is programmed in the programmable one-
touch key.
Erase the programmable one-touch key that con-
tains the F-Code box or Batch box you want to
erase, then try again.
You tried to enter a call group number greater
than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call
groups, numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all
the groups). Determine the correct call group
identifier number and enter it, instead.
Invalid I.D. Code
Invalid Number
Invalid Paper Size
The F-Code box
I
.
D. code you entered isn’t valid.
Try re-entering your F-Code box
I.D. code.
Enter Reduce/Enlarge
You tried to copy your document on the paper
other than A4, A5 or F4 sized paper using the
bypass tray, or the calculated reduction or
enlargement ratio is out of the acceptable range
(50 – 200 %) when the copy reduction or
enlargement ratio is set to “Auto”.
Enter the reduction or enlargement ratio manu-
ally although a part of the image might be
lacking, or change the paper for copying.
You pressed a key which has no function during
the current operation.
If the optional printer controller is attached to
your machine, it can use the special sized paper
with the bypass tray. However, it should be used
only for the PC printing, it cannot be used for
copying. So, if you tried to copy onto the special
sized paper with bypass tray, this message will
appear.
Enter Scan Size
Feeder In Use
When you using the platen glass, you must
manually enter the scan size of your document.
Press DOCUMENT SIZE to choose the size.
Invalid Passcode
Line Busy
The protection passcode you entered isn’t valid.
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-
tion passcode.
The command you’re trying to enter requires the
use of the ADF, which is already in use. Wait for
the machine to stop using the ADF, then try
again.
You tried to erase a document which someone is
polling from your machine. Wait for the fax to
complete the polling operation, then try again.
5.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Macro In Use
You tried to change the function for a Soft key,
but that Soft key has been programmed in a
Macro key. You cannot change the Soft key func-
tion until erase the Macro key that contains the
Soft key you want to change. Erase the Macro
key, then try again.
No Passcode
You tried to program a security feature (see
page 3.49), but there’s no protection passcode
stored in your fax machine. Store a protection
passcode in your machine, then retry again.
No PIN Number
You selected “Mode1” in the PIN mask feature
and tried to call an autodialer number in which
no PIN has been entered, or to call using numeric
keypad without PIN. Enter a PIN, then try again.
Memory Overflow
Start Or Cancel
During transmission (or copying), you tried to
enter more pages into memory than your fax
could store. Press START to tell your fax to keep
as many pages in memory as possible, or press
CANCEL to delete from memory all pages stored
during this operation (but not previous opera-
tions).
No Report
You requested an activity journal or confirma-
tion report, but your fax machine has no record
of any fax jobs having occurred.
No Toner Cartridge
Not Allowed in Macro
Other Key Setting
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been
properly installed in your fax machine. Please
properly install the toner cartridge.
Mirror Carriage Error
Mirror Locked
The mirror carriage of your machine has become
inoperable. Call your authorised Konica dealer.
During macro registration, you pressed the key
which cannot be registered in Macro, such as
Monitor/Call key or Security Reception key.
The transport mode is not turned off.
Turn off the transport mode (see page 1.8).
No Command
You pressed COMM. CANCEL/CONFIRM. to review
upcoming commands, but your fax machine had
none stored.
You tried to enter the same function which is
already stored in other Soft key.
Store the different function.
No Department Code
You tried to turn on the department code setting
but there are no department codes stored in
your fax machine. Store at least one department
code, then try again.
Open Top Cover
Please Remove Paper
Open 1st Side Cover
Please Remove Paper
The paper is jammed in your fax machine.
Open the cover indicated on the LCD, and
remove the jammed paper carefully.
. . . or . . .
You entered incorrect department code at fax
sending while the department feature is on.
Enter correct department code.
Open 2nd Side Cover
Please Remove Paper
Open Top/2-Bin Cover
Please Remove Paper
Remove Bypass Paper
Open&Close Top Cover
No Document Stored
No Drum
You tried to print a document from memory, but
your fax machine had none stored.
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been
properly installed in your fax machine.
Please properly install the drum cartridge.
Open&Close ScanCover
Reset Document
Either your document wasn’t inserted correctly,
or the fax to which you’re sending can’t handle
the document’s page length. Reset the page and
try again.
No Number Stored
You selected an autodialer, batch box or F-Code
box number for which there is no fax (or phone)
number programmed. Either choose another
number or dial a phone number directly from the
numeric keypad.
Please Call Service
The printer unit of your fax machine has become
inoperable. Call your authorised Konica dealer.
5.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Please Supply Paper
The paper cassette or bypass tray is out of
paper. Supply paper to the cassette and/or the
bypass tray.
SecurityRx is Off
You tried to turn the security reception ON using
a Soft key which is assigned to set the security
reception to ON or OFF, but security reception
setting has not set to on.
To turn on or off the security reception using a
Soft key, first set the security reception setting to
on. (See pages 3.49–3.50.)
Please Wait
Your fax machine’s printer is either warming up
or busy. Please wait until the fax is finished
printing and then re-try your command or opera-
tion.
Select Paper Size
You tried to make a copy in the following condi-
tions:
•Paper size selection is set to “Auto”.
•The bypass tray has the paper other than A4,
A5 or F4.
•Paper cassette(s) runs out of paper.
Press PAPER SIZE to select your desired paper.
Polling In Use
You tried to store the polling document in your
fax machine, where one already had been
stored. Wait for the fax to complete the regular
polling operation or delete the stored document,
then try again.
Printer In Use
The command you’re trying to enter requires the
use of the printer, which is already in use. Wait
for the fax to finish printing, then try again.
Sub-address In Use
You tried to enter a sub-address identical to one
already being used in another F-Code box. Enter
a different sub-address.
Protect Doc. Stored
A received document was in your fax’s memory
when you tried to turn off the security reception
passcode. Print the received document from your
fax’s memory, then retry the desired operation.
TONER ALMOST EMPTY
Your machine is almost out of toner.
Please contact your authorised Konica dealer
soon to purchase a new toner cartridge if you
don’t already have one.
Ration must be 100%
You cannot set the magnification ratio in
Negative/Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.
Set the magnification ratio to 100 % to use the
Negative/Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.
TONER EMPTY
PRINTER NOT USABLE
Your toner cartridge is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge. Your machine cannot
print until it is replaced with a new toner car-
tridge.
REPLACE DRUM SOON
Your drum will need to be replaced soon.
Please contact your authorised Konica dealer to
purchase a new drum cartridge if you don’t
already have one.
Too Many Characters
Too Many Locations
You attempted to enter too many numbers or
other characters in the current operation.
Press CANCEL to delete the extra characters, then
try again. You may wish to review the operation’s
appropriate instructions.
REPLACE DRUM UNIT
PRINTER NOT USABLE
Your drum cartridge doesn’t work.
Your machine cannot print until it is replaced
with a new drum cartridge.
Replace it.
You tried to enter too many numbers for a
broadcast. You can enter up to 200 autodialer
number and up to 30 numbers entered through
the numeric keypad.
Press CANCEL to delete the extra numbers and
then try again.
Scanner In Use
The command you’re trying to enter requires the
use of the scanner, which is already in use. Wait
for the fax to complete the scan, then re-try the
desired command.
5.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
What you see on the LCD
What it means/What to do
Errors
Too Many Steps
You tried to enter too many steps for a macro.
You can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key.
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communications errors.
These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.
(These same factors cause the static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone
calls.) They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of
the line.
Often, simply trying your call again is all that’s necessary. However, if the problem
persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn’t help and
the problem persists regularly, call your authorised Konica dealer.
Unable to Reduce
In the reduction copy using the ADF, if the
calculated ratio is smaller than minimum reduc-
tion ratio (50%), this message will appear and
you cannot make the reduction copy.
Use the platen glass, however parts of the image
might not be copied.
Use FBS Glass
You tried to enlargement copy using the ADF.
Your machine cannot enlargement copy from the
ADF. Please set your document on the platen
glass to make the enlargement copy.
Error reports
When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error report
lists an error message which includes:
• A possible solution to the problem
• The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)
• The result — which is a special error code.
• A sample of the document’s first page.
Kinds of error codes
The error code listed in the “Result” column of the error report indicates the specific
problem encountered:
• “D” codes — Occur while dialing
• “R” codes — Occur during reception
• “T” codes — Occur during transmission
Specific errors
Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:
Dialing errors
D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or STOP was
D.0.8 pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,
call the remote fax unit’s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.
D.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or
D.0.7 STOP was pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
5.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Reception errors
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions
can change rapidly, so try the call again later.
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn’t respond to your fax machine. This can hap-
pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts
access through use of a passcode.
T.3.1 The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error dur-
ing transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try
the call.
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, page 5.17) fax communication, the
industry standard since the early 1980s.
T.3.2 The fax machine didn’t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.
T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive
modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper. Try the call again.
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Try the call again.
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-
one at the remote machine’s location.
T.4.4 Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Try the call again.
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving
fax machine.
T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change
T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.
T.5.3
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem
during transmission.
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-
erly printing some or all of the pages it received.
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equaliser training phase.
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax
machine needs maintenance.
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).
R.5.2
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
Transmission errors
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. Call someone at the
remote machine’s location.
T.1.2 Your fax machine’s page counter detected a possible document feeder error.
Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.
T.1.4 STOP was pressed during transmission.
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-
tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Try the call again.
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see “Glossary,” page 5.17) fax communication,
the industry standard since the early 1980s.
5.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
“Check Message” printouts
When there’s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it pro-
duces an error printout headed by the words “Check Message.” This printout lists
the following information about the transmission:
• The resulting error code
• A communications error message (see “What error messages can mean,” below)
• The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your
machine had attempted to communicate.
What error messages can mean
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.
Here’s a brief summary:
Error message
Possible meanings
Check condition of remote fax. • Remote machine malfunctioned
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax
• Wrong phone number reached
Repeat transmission.
• Poor phone line conditions
• No “handshake” signals from remote fax
• Document misfeed or miscount
• Unable to reach remote machine after
attempting specified number of redial tries
Line is busy.
• Remote machine’s line was busy
• Remote machine’s line didn’t answer
Check received documents.
• Remote confirmation signal not received
from remote fax
• Poor line conditions caused a poor image
Memory full.
• Remote fax’s memory is full
Dialing number is not set.
Stopped.
• Stored phone number failed to dial properly
• Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax
in the middle of the “handshake”
5.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Caring for your fax machine
With proper installation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you
dependable service for years to come.
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to
keep it in top form:
Corrective cleaning
Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your fax machine operating
smoothly. Use each as the need arises.
• Always make sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review “Pick an
installation spot,” page 1.5.)
Curing frequent jams in the ADF
If you’re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly, try
this procedure:
• Always use good, copier-quality paper.
Turn off your fax machine.
• Always clean your fax machine as needed (see “Cleaning tips,” below).
1
2
• Never install your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:
• One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. In steps 4 and
6, we’ll call this the rollers cleaner.
splashed by any liquids (even water).
• The other with isopropyl alcohol
Cleaning tips
Open the scanner cover by holding the scanner cover release.
Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:
3
Important: You must hold the cover open. It won’t stay open by itself.
• Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machine’s air vents can
shorten your machine’s life.
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate
the rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface.
4
• Always unplug the fax machine before you clean it.
• Never spray any cleaner DIRECTLY onto your fax machine. The drifting
spray could damage components inside.
• Never try to clean SEALED areas inside your fax machine. They’re sealed to
protect your safety and the machine.
• For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover: use a mild cleaning solution
sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.
• Always use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to gently wipe
components inside your machine.
• In areas you can’t reach with swabs, always use dry, dust-free compressed air to
gently blow away dust and other material.
5.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality
Open the inner cover fully.
5
6
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which
are very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality
(whether on received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires
service. Review “Print quality problems” (pages 5.3-5.4), and see whether any of the
proposed solutions helps your machine. If none do, please call your authorised
Konica dealer.
Important: You must hold the cover open. It won’t stay open by itself.
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to
clean the face of the rollers. Rotate the
rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the
entire roller surface.
Cleaning the LED print head
If you find your fax recipients complaining that the faxes you receive or copy image
quality are streaked, the LED print head may be dirty.
Important: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the
machine.
Cleaning the platen glass, contact glass and white pad
Open the platen cover.
Turn off your fax machine.
1
2
1
2
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it
with isopropyl alcohol.
Important: Make sure the cloth doesn’t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it
could scratch the glass surface of the platen.
Open the top cover and then open the
printer cover.
3
Using the cloth, gently clean the platen glass, contact glass and the white
background area on the underside of the platen cover.
3
Important: The fuser unit becomes
very hot. Do not touch
the fuser unit when you are cleaning the LED print head.
Using the cloth, gently clean the LED print head.
4
Note: Do not use abrasive materials on the LED print head, and do not
subject the LED print head to strongly shock.
5.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Common questions
General questions
Sending faxes
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine’s printouts darker?
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using the MONITOR/CALL feature. But,
when the other side answers, I hear a horrible screeching sound, so I hang up.
What’s happening?
A: You can’t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust
the darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CON-
TRAST to adjust the contrast setting. “Dark” prints at the darkest setting. The
machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or
sending the fax.
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information
I’ve stored — such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. — and
have to re-enter them?
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say “Hello” to your machine! You’ll
hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer
automatically (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It’s by
using these tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone
lines. So, next time you hear the tones, press START to send a fax.
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine’s display
A: No. There’s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user
settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.
However, we do advise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.
during the transmission wasn’t the number I dialed. Why?
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.
Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they’re really
using. And some people don’t know how to change the number once it’s set.
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-
Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?
heat.
A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be
sure to include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing.
Also, remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?
A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local
telephone company’s requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then
dial the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may find
country and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?
A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 3.21) aren’t available when you trans-
mit without recording paper in your fax machine.
Q: Can I transmit a document that’s extra long?
A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that
exceed the normal length.
5.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?
• The transmission time measured for test documents doesn’t include hand-
shake time — the time during which two fax machines “introduce”
A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy
machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then
transmit the copy.
themselves to each other and “agree on” the parameters of the call.
• The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You
may be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes
longer than normal mode.
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?
A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.
Q: What’s a default?
A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is
programmed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a
fax by using its memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your
machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see
pages 3.21).
Q: I don’t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I’ve con-
nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones
ring. How do I prevent this?
Reports
A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my
transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn’t the whole number appear? How
can I be sure my document went to the right location?
able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using the MONITOR/CALL, I don’t hear the
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-
ory “buffer”, and it’s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer
“remembers.” An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on
your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys
or speed-dial numbers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety
on your TCR.
fax receiving tones from the other machine. Am I doing something wrong?
A: When this happens, try pressing START, as usual. It’s possible you’re calling an
older, non-standard fax machine that doesn’t emit answering tones. Even a few
Group 3 faxes (see “Glossary,” page 5.17) on the market sound a sending tone
but don’t sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other
fax machine’s location to see if that person got your document.
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine
didn’t transmit the document. Instead, “** Auto Redial **” now appears on
my LCD. What does this mean?
A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again, auto-
matically. As long as it hasn’t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting
automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it
has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try canceling one
of the delayed commands (see page 2.7). If the machine still won’t cooperate,
keep canceling commands until it does.
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but
when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?
A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-
ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the “Slerexe letter”).
Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:
• The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,
than ITU-T Test Document 1.
5.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Receiving faxes
Q: My fax never answers. What’s wrong?
Polling
Q: What’s the purpose of polling?
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC
power outlet and phone jack (see page 1.7). If you’re using a second phone with
your machine, make sure it’s connected properly.
A: Polling lets you automatically “pull” a document which is set in another fax
machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don’t
want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and
get the information you need.
Q: Sometimes when I answer a call with the phone which is connected to my
machine, I hear a beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?
A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next
time, press START and hang up your telephone. Your fax will receive the mes-
sage.
How your fax machine works
How a fax machine works is simple:
You put a page into your fax machine’s feeder and call a fax number. Your machine
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then …
Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the AC power jack to receive a
message?
• Your machine takes the document.
A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can’t receive a
fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC
power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss
an important fax message.
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.
• Your machine wraps the document.
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and
compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.
• Your machine sends the document.
Q: Can I receive a fax if I’m using the phone on my machine?
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you’re talking. When that per-
son has a document ready in his/her machine’s feeder, press START
.
On the other end of the line …
• The remote fax machine receives the code.
• Your machine unwraps the document.
Working with your answering machine
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a
representation of the scan your machine made.
Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering
machine’s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?
• The remote fax machine prints the representation.
A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must “hear” responding fax
tones within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.
That 40 seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialing the number, “listening”
to the pause before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering
the ring. Only after that time does your message play.
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of
the transmission:
• On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.
• On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.
That’s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the
waiting period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed
with the transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering
machine that’s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 2.11 for a suggestion).
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the
ITU applies ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other
machines worldwide. However, they also limit the way you can use your machine
with other devices, such as telephones and answering machines.
5.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Glossary
This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax
machines. Please use these definitions for reference only.
Broadcast — A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one loca-
tion.
bps — Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax trans-
mission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and
numeric characters, bps does not correspond to the number of characters transmitted per sec-
ond.
24-hour format — Also called military format. A format for keeping time that does not use
a.m. or p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o’clock
in the morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-
hour format, add 12 hours to all times after noon.
Byte — A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.
For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 in the
Call reserve — Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows a user to
24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.
request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.
A3, A4, B4 — Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards
Organization, an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.
Call-waiting service — An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another
incoming call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption
of fax transmission or reception.
ADF — Automatic document feeder. See document feeder.
Caller ID — Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to
see a display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.
Alternate number — The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular
number fail. The user programs this alternate number, if so desired.
CCITT — See ITU-T
.
Answering machine — See TAD.
CCD, CIS — Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning mechanisms
used in some Konica fax machines. The CCD “reads” fluorescent light bouncing off a document.
The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
Autodialing — Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit’s mem-
ory. Storage capability varies from unit to unit.
Automatic fallback — The ability of a fax machine to slow down (“fall back”), when commu-
nicating with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.
Command queue — The “list” your machine keeps of all its pending commands.
Command number — The number your machine gives to each “job” it is programmed to
complete. You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the
machine’s jobs that it stores.
Automatic reduction — Many fax machines will automatically reduce the size of docu-
ments being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving unit.
For example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ (256 mm) scanning width to send an image
10″ (256 mm) wide to a unit with an 8.3″ (210 mm) print width. The receiving fax machine
will receive a reduced-size printout of the complete image.
Compatibility — The term “compatible” describes the ability of separate things to function
together. Your fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility, the modern standard for
worldwide communication.
Bit — The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some fax machines, which are actually
computers “dedicated” to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of information to
provide or cancel features through software settings.
Confidential transmission — See SecureMail.
Confirmation report — See TCR.
Bits per second — See bps.
Continuous polling — See Polling.
Black density — Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For
example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the
presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even
spaces within letters. However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,
sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page’s black density, the more slowly a fax
machine sends it.
Copy mode — Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.
Cover page (automatic) — A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every
transmission.
Database polling — See Polling.
Data compression — Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digital
fax, MH and MSE, SMSE.
5.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Default — The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been pro-
Halftone — See Grayscale.
grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its
memory. If you set this action as the default, that’s how your machine will always send a fax,
until you tell it to do differently.
Handshaking — An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or
computer equipment that “introduces” two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a
handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to begin fax communication.
Delayed command — Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, auto-
matically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times
when telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.
Hub — See Relay broadcasting.
Hz (or Hertz) — A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-
tions for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.
Digital — Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or 1s) to describe every-
thing, so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image of
your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to
encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white
spaces. See also White-line skip.
ITU-T — International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly
known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.) A
telecommunications forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group
XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and
transmission. Our Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the ITU-T
when communicating with other Group 3 units.
Digital fax — Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax
machines survey a document’s overall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and
convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this
information and compresses it, providing high transmission speeds.
ITU-T Test Document 1 — Also called the Slerexe (“slehr-rehks”) letter; An ITU-T standard
document with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission
speeds of their fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.
Document feeder — The adjustable slot into which users place documents for faxing or
copying.
ITU-T V.29 and V.27 ter. — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax
machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.
Effective printing width — The widest image that can be printed on a fax.
JBIG — Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data compression
method. As JBIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is especially effective when
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.
Effective scan width — The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan during trans-
mission.
F-Code — A fax-industry standard created by the ITU-T for sub-addressing/password-based
communications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, your fax machines as well as all
ITU-T equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other
using sub-addressing.
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)
Laser printing — A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and
an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat
and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.
Facsimile (or fax) — A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a docu-
ment into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another
device. This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document.
Also, a machine that performs such communication.
LCD — Liquid crystal display.
Leased line — See Private line.
Load number — A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;
designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-
ber.
Fallback — Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a
given telephone line. Our systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during trans-
mission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.
Location ID — See Station ID.
lpi — Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see Normal
resolution.)
File number — A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code
or polling operation.
Memory — Internal document storage. In your fax machines, random access memory in the
form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold
some documents that have been received.
Fine resolution — 203H × 196V lpi. Also shown as
G
3
F
(“Group 3 fine”) on some fax units.
Grayscale — Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone
images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in
levels of gray between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have grayscale
ability to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to
print the image.
Memory overflow — A message that appears on the machine’s LCD when the
current operation requires more of the machine’s electronic memory than what is available.
Group 3 — Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page
in less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or 406 × 392 lpi.
5.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Platen — A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some our fax
machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books
and other awkward sources.
MH — Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only. A feature of all our
fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one page per minute when communicat-
ing with other Group 3 units, regardless of manufacturer. See also MR, MMR.
Polling — Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a
remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive
information from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and pre-
vents several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.
Military format — See 24-hour format.
Modem — Modulator-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like information from
a fax machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A modem
is included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTN telephone line.
Private line — (Or leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an
exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. Your fax does not require a private
line. See also PSTN.
MR — Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimen-
sional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions and
allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of
manufacturer.
Proprietary — Non-standard. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in communi-
cations between fax machines that are the same brand.
MMR — Modified Modified Read, an ITU-T Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-
dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in both horizontal and vertical directions
and allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless
of manufacturer.
PSTN — Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and
service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. Your fax provides fast, reliable data
transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See
also Private line.
Monitor — A speaker in most our fax machines which allows the user to hear the dialing
process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the person
being called.
Receiver ID — See Station ID.
Redialing — The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most
recently dialed fax or phone number. Automatic redialing follows an unsuccessful dialing
attempt and can be done manually or automatically.
MSE, SMSE — The proprietary data compression methods.
Normal resolution — Shown as “norm”; 203H × 98V lpi. The default resolution mode for all
Relay broadcasting — Lets some Konica fax machines store a document in internal mem-
ory, transmit the document to the memory of a remote “hub” fax and then instruct that unit
to relay (re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the “hub” unit. This feature
speeds extremely high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate
document transmission to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone
charges for the originating machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.
our fax machines.
Original document size — The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely
through a fax machine.
Override — To change existing settings.
Paper sizes — All are width × length:
Remote fax machine — The machine on the other “end” of a fax communication.
Letter-sized = 8.5″ × 11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)
A4 = 8.3″ × 11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)
A3 = 11.7″ × 16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)
Legal-sized = 8.5″ × 14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)
B5 = 7.2″ × 10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)
B4 = 10.1″ × 14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)
REN — See Ringer equivalence number.
Resolution — The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is mea-
sured by the number of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the unit can print.
Our unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:
Passcode — A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode lets the
user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documents readied for
polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode
will be able to poll the document.)
Normal
Fine
Superfine 203H × 392V lpi
203H
203H × 196V lpi
×
98V lpi
PBX (or PABX) — Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a
particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital transmission lines which,
unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should
not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking with the system manufacturer or ser-
vice representative.
Some our units also offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accurate reproduc-
tion of photographs and other shaded originals.
Ringer equivalence number — Also called REN. A number assigned to telecommunications
equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit.
See also Load number.
PCL — Page Control Language. An industry standard for printer control. Some our fax
machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.
Scanning width — See Effective scanning width.
5.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
Secure polling — Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two machines
V.34 — An international standard for fax modems — and other modems — with transmission
speeds of up to 36.6 Kbps. It represents the current maximum standard transmission speed
possible under ITU-T Group 3.
before polling is allowed to take place.
Speed-dialing — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing with
the touch of three keys — an identifier key (either * or #) and then a three-digit code — for
each number. See also Autodialing and One-touch dialing.
White-line skip — A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing redundant
areas, such as white space.
Station ID — (Also called Location ID or Receiver ID.) An autodialer feature which lets the fax
user enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an autodialer entry. For
example, rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, the user can enter that number and a
name, such as Dallas Branch Office.
Subaddressing — An ITU-T standard allowing fax machines to specify special delivery
characteristics of a transmission. For example, subaddressing allows fax machines from dif-
ferent manufacturers to send and receive messages into confidential memory mailboxes, or to
retrieve specific files from polling memory.
Subscriber ID — A fax machine’s telephone number, as identified by a user setting. See TTI.
Super Group 3 — An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of
high-speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid
handshaking.
Superfine resolution — 203H × 392V lpi. Your fax machine’s superfine transmission mode
is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.
TAD — Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages
for playback. You can connect a TAD to your fax machine and use the two on one phone line.
TCR — Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your fax did send the document
you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR also identifies the telephone
number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission and how
many pages the unit transmitted.
Thermal (paper) printing — A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive
paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed
image. Thermal paper’s tendency to discolour and fade, in addition to its curliness and the
usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-
paper fax printing — particularly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.
TTI — Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent automati-
cally with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the
receiving unit.
Transmission speed — How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This speed
depends upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the content of the docu-
ment, the encoding technique and the condition of the phone line (clean, noisy, etc.) Any
change in any one of these five conditions will affect the speed, sometimes significantly.
V.29 and v.27 ter — A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to
talk to other units using those standards. Specifically, these standards cover fax transmission
at 9600 bps or slower.
5.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just in case …
This page is intentionally blank.
5.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Specifications
General
Document input
Type:
Compatibility:
Phone system:
Desktop plain paper facsimile
ITU-T Group 3
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or
equivalent
Multitasking
55 locations
145 locations
Document set:
ADF :Face Up
PLATEN GLASS:Face down
Original reference position:
Scanning resolution:
ADF :Center
PLATEN GLASS:Front right corner
(horizontal in dots/mm × vertical in lines/mm):
Dual access:
One-touch dial:
Speed dial:
Transmission:
Normal
8 × 3.85
8 × 7.7
8 × 14.5
8 × 7.7
Fine
Superfine
Grayscale
Copy:
Operating Environment
Environmental temperature: 10º C to 32º C
Relative humidity:
300 × 300 dpi
Flatbed CCD
208 mm (Fax), 210 mm (Copy)
(width × height)
ADF; single sheet:
Maximum 216 mm × 900 mm
Minimum 120 mm × 100 mm
ADF; two or more sheets :
Maximum 216 mm × 356 mm
Minimum 210 mm × 148 mm
20 to 80% RH
Scanning method:
Scanning width:
Document size :
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
Power: 230V AC 50/60 Hz.
Sleep mode
Standby
Maximum
:
:
:
18 W
100 Wh
870 W
Communication
Coding method:
ITU-T-standard MMR, MR, MH and MSE (propri-
etary mode).
14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800, 2,400 bps
Yes
8MB (650 pages* approx.)
Upgrade Option:
plus 8MB (additional 680 pages* approx.)
PLATEN GLASS
Maximum 216 mm × 356 mm
50 sheets
Modem speed:
Error correction mode:
Memory capacity:
ADF capacity:
Document thickness:
2
30.2–104.7 g/m , 13-24 lb (Single sheet)
2
52.3–80 g/m , 13-20 lb (Two or more sheets)
Grayscale:
256-level
Memory backup time:
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)
8MB : 72 hours
Printout
Printer resolution:
First copy time:
16MB: 36 hours
600 dpi
(Must be charged for at least 24 hours to reach full
charge)
Approx. 12 seconds (using A4-sized paper in 1st
paper cassette)
Face up exit system
Polling/Broadcasting:
Transmission speed:
230 locations / 230 locations
Approx. 6 seconds per page.**
Paper exit system:
AI.1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Printing method:
LED scanning, Electrophotographic dry powered
image transfer to plain paper
Print speed:
Up to 13 ppm (using A4-sized paper in 1st paper
cassette)
Receive reduction print:
Auto (Variable from 100% to 50% by 1% ratio)
Fixed (100%)
Copy reduce and enlarge ratio: Variable from 50% to 200% by 1% ratio
Fixed (200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%,
70% or 50%)
Smoothing print:
Yes
Printing paper size:
Paper cassette;
A4, A5, F4
Bypass tray; ****
A4, A5, F4, A6, Letter, Legal, Half-letter, Executive,
DL, Com#10, Monarch, Postcard (100 × 148 mm)
2
Paper capacity:
Paper cassette; 500 sheets (60–90 g/m , 20–24 lb)
2
Bypass tray; 50 sheets (60–90 g/m , 20–24 lb)
2
Receiving paper tray capacity: 300 sheets (60–90 g/m , 20–24 lb)
Miscellaneous
Weight:
Approx. 23.3 Kg
Dimensions :
Width 510 × Depth 492 × Height 376 (mm)
Approx. 20,000 pages*****
Approx. 16,000 pages*****
Approx. 3,000 pages*****
Drum cartridge life:
Toner cartridge life:
Starter toner cartridge life:
* Using the ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Konica fax machine with normal resolution.
** Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Konica fax machine. Your trans-
mission times will vary, but your fax machine always will provide the fastest
transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines and phone-line conditions.
*** When using the postcard, the printing speed will be slower.
**** The Letter, Legal, Half-letter, A6, Executive, DL, Com#10, Monarch and Postcard can
be used only for coping.
***** Based on 6% document coverage and A4-sized two-page interval printing.
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AI.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Index
Print margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Setting copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Setting Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
for dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Pause length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
2-bin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Primary standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Setting Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Setting the silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Half-page reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Print reduction rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Reduction margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
for transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
ECM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Primary contrast mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Primary resolution mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
TTI Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Print your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Comm. Cancel/Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Comm. light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Basic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Image contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Multiple copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Reduce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Reversing black and white areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Single copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Using the bypass tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Copy light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Copy setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17, 4.10
A
AC power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
AC power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Alarm light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Call group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
One-touch dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Speed-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
B
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Creating or modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Erasing a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Printing a list of batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Storing a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Block JunkFax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 3.9
Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Bypass key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
C
Call group dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Cancelling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Changing the default settings
for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Copy auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Primary contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Primary document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
AI.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Auto reset time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
TTI transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Cancelling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Dialing pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
from Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
How to set the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
In real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Resolution, grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
using monitor/call key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
using the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
using the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Bulletin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25, 3.29
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Erase Tx Doc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Overwrite Doc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Rx Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Creating or modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Erasing an empty F-Code box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
F-Code polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
F-Code transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Printing a list of F-Code boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Relay box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25, 3.31
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Select TTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Security box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25, 3.31
Document hold time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Function table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Copy auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Copy Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Document type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Nega/Posi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Negative/Positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Sort copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
D
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Department code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Dial Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Dialing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.6
E
Energy saving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Extension paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
F
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Fax light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Fax setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19, 2.10, 3.53, 4.10
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Department code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Department code protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.56
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Half-page reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Journal auto print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Journal Line Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Phone Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
PIN mask feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
Quick Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Reception modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Reduction margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Rx reduction rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
I
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
J
Jammed paper, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
L
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
M
Machine setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18, 4.10
2-BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
AI.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Paper size of the 1st cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size of the 2nd cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size of the Bypass Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
Paper source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Primary mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Alarm & Key Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Alarm Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Key Buzzer Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Ringer Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Printing a list of your Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Memory receive light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Mirror carriage locking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Multi-Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Copy settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Fax settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Machine settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Q
Quick memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
R
Real time transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Reports, confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
S
Security features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Block Junk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.55
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Adjust the monitor speaker’s volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Attach the extension paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Installing the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Pick an installation spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Turning off the transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Unlocking the mirror carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Soft Key labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3, 3.16
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Sorting copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Dial Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Fax & Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
F-Code Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Macro keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1-AI.2
O
One-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Entering or changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
One-touch fax dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
One-touch phone dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Printing a list of one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
P
Page counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Acceptable paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
Paper size stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Pause character, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
PIN masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Limiting polling access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Regular polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Printer status lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
AI.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix and index
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Entering or changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Fax dialing via speed-dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Subscriber ID (your fax's phone number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
T
Telephone Index dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Telephone line cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identifier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
V
View the result of fax transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
AI.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Konica Business Machines
Deutschland GmbH
Lilienthalstrasse 1, D-21337 Luneburg (Germany)
Tel: (+49) 4131-886-320
Fax: (+49) 4131-886-307
Copyright© 2003 by Konica Business Machine; all rights reserved.
Printed in China.
D88-90310-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|